DoorKing 2019 Door King Price Book 2019doorkingpricebook

User Manual: DoorKing 2019 DoorKing Price Book Price Book

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 180

DownloadDoorKing  2019 Door King Price Book 2019doorkingpricebook
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
January, 2019

Price Schedule
Effective January 7, 2019

Schedule A 2.0
Section A1 - Vehicular Traffic Control ........................................................................................ 1
Section A2 – Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems ......................................................... 2
Section A3 – Access Control Devices ......................................................................................... 3
Section A4 - Accessories ............................................................................................................ 4
Section A5 – Advanced Replacement & Repair ......................................................................... 5

Schedule B 1.5
Section B1 – Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators.............................................................. 6

Schedule C 1.1
Section C1 – Connection Options: Cellular, VoIP & IM Server................................................... 7

Access Control Solutions

Terms and Conditions of Sale

Rev 1-7-19

Terms and Conditions of Sale
General Information
All descriptions, quotations, proposals, offers,
acknowledgments, acceptances and sales of DoorKing®
products are subject to and shall be governed exclusively
by the terms and conditions stated herein. Buyer's
acceptance of any offer to sell is limited to these terms
and conditions. Any terms or conditions in addition to,
or inconsistent with those stated herein, proposed by
Buyer in any acceptance of an offer by DoorKing, are
hereby objected to. No such additional, different or
inconsistent terms and conditions shall become part of
the contract between Buyer and DoorKing unless
expressly accepted in writing by DoorKing. DoorKing
acceptance of any offer to purchase by Buyer is expressly
conditional upon Buyer's assent to all the terms and
conditions stated herein, including any terms in addition
to, or inconsistent with those contained in Buyer's offer.
Acceptance of DoorKing products shall in all events
constitute such assent. No agent or representative of
DoorKing, Inc. has any express or implied authority to
make any representation, promise or guarantee not
stated herein.
These policies and terms and conditions of sale may be
modified by DoorKing at any time. Please contact your
DoorKing representative with any questions regarding
these policies and terms and conditions of sale.

Authorized Distributors & Dealers
DoorKing uses a vertical marketing system (VMS) to allow
our products to be distributed across the country, easily
available and to have our products installed correctly,
safely and professionally by licensed installing dealers.
This is most important as our products are not designed
for the DIY (Do It Yourself) market. Our products must be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
installation manuals, industry safety standards, building
codes and/or city/state/federal requirements and
guidelines. Most lay persons are unaware of, or are not
familiar with, these standards and codes and do not
realize the potential hazards associated with an
incorrectly designed or installed automated vehicular
gate and access control system. These systems, if not
properly designed, installed, used and maintained, can
result in serious injuries or death. Because of these
reasons, DoorKing has chosen to market its products only
to professional companies, who are trained, licensed and
insured to sell and/or install access control systems,
vehicular gate operating systems, parking control
systems and security systems. DoorKing does not
condone business models that bypass the professional
installing dealer and we reserve the right to eliminate the
availability of our products from companies who sell
direct to the DIY market.

Terms
Initial terms of sale to new accounts are C.O.D., cash,
cashier check or credit card only (American Express,
Master Card and Visa). Company checks will be accepted
after a DoorKing credit application is completed and
approved by our Sales and Credit Department. Open
account status will be granted only after $2000 of
product has been purchased from DoorKing.
Our terms of sale are net 30-days from the invoice date.
A 1 ½% finance charge is assessed on all account balances
over 30-days from the invoice date. Any account that is
past due will be placed on C.O.D. terms and is subject to
stop shipment. All invoices are payable in U.S. currency
only. A service charge of $25.00 will be assessed on any
check returned by our bank because of non-payment.
Buyer agrees to pay reasonable collection cost,
reasonable attorney’s fees and actual court cost if these
charges are incurred by DoorKing in the collection of
monies owed on buyers account.

Pricing
This price schedule supersedes any and all previous price
schedules. We do not honor prices quoted from an
obsolete price schedule nor do we honor prices for
obsolete products with prices derived from an obsolete
price schedule. The information, terms and conditions
and prices in this price schedule (January, 2019)
supersede all previous published prices, agreements and
any oral representations.
While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy
of the information and prices contained in this
document, no guarantee is given or implied that the
document is error free or that it is accurate with regard
to any specification. DoorKing reserves the right to make
changes to this document at any time without notice.
All prices shown are subject to change without notice.
We suggest that you confirm pricing on any custom,
special or large order with the Sales Department prior to
placing the order. Current price schedules are sent to
authorized DoorKing distributors and dealers upon
request. Current DoorKing price schedules are available
for download from company web sites. If you have a
price schedule that is over one (1) year old, we suggest
that you download or request a new one. We are not
responsible for quotations made from an obsolete price
schedule. All prices in this price schedule are shown in
U.S. Dollars.
Authorized Distributors and Dealers - please use our web
portal for prices not found in this price schedule.
https://webportal.doorking.com/

Page 1

Rev 1-7-19

Terms and Conditions of Sale

Quotations

Drop Shipments:

All written quotations will remain valid for a period of
thirty (30) days from the date quoted, unless otherwise
noted. If DoorKing is asked to review plan documents,
specifications or to provide a quote, it does so as a
courtesy and is not responsible for any errors or
omissions either in quantity, type or price of the
equipment quoted.

Dealers: If you have more than one place of business, a
separate account number for each ship-to location must
be established with DoorKing, otherwise a drop shipment
fee of 25% of the invoice (less taxes and freight) will be
applied to those invoices with a ship to location that does
not have an account number established.

Taxes and Fees
Prices shown in this price schedule do not include sales,
use, excise, value-added or other taxes and fees that may
be applicable. All such taxes and fees in effect and/or
hereafter levied which are applicable to the transaction,
are in addition to such prices and shall be paid by the
Buyer.

Will Call
If an order is will called at our shipping warehouse, once
the order has been signed for as being received, any
shortages, loss or damage is the responsibility of the
Buyer.

Shipping
All shipments are F.O.B. (Free On Board) from our
shipping warehouse in Inglewood, California via a carrier
of our choice. This means that the Buyer assumes title
and control of the shipment the moment the carrier signs
the Bill of Lading.
Buyer is responsible for all
transportation costs including, but not limited to,
shipping charges, premiums for freight insurance,
inspection fees, customs, duties, import or export fees,
assessments, and all other costs incurred in transporting
the products to the shipping destination.
Regardless of how transportation costs are paid or billed,
title and risk of loss passes to the Buyer upon delivery of
the products to the carrier at DoorKing’s warehouse. Our
responsibility ceases when we have delivered the
shipment to the transportation company on a clean bill
of lading. We obtain signed manifest from the carrier
and it is the Buyer’s responsibility to submit all claims for
shortages, loss or damaged goods to the transportation
company.
Check Your Shipment Carefully. Upon receipt of your
order, check your shipment for any signs of shortages,
loss or damage. If you suspect any shortages, loss or
damage, this must be noted on the carrier’s Bill of Lading.
Once you sign the Bill of Lading without any notation of
shortages, loss or damage, you release the carrier and
DoorKing of any liability and responsibility for any
shortages, loss or damage. Claims for errors or
shortages must be made immediately upon receipt of
order. Claims for shortages, loss or damage cannot be
deducted from our invoice.

Page 2

Distributors: You will need to establish an account
number with DoorKing for each of your locations (if more
than one) that you want us to ship to, and for each of
your dealer customers that you want us to ship to,
otherwise a drop shipment fee of 25% of the invoice (less
taxes and freight) will be applied to those invoices with a
ship to location that does not have an account number
established.
To establish an account number for a ship to location,
complete the Ship to Account Information Short Form
and return it to DoorKing (info@dooorking.com).
Drop ship fees apply only to new orders for finished
goods and non-warranty parts, and will be applied
regardless of the method of shipping (common carrier,
UPS, FedEx, Postal, etc.). No drop shipments will be
made to destinations outside of the United States (50
states).
Drop ship fees are not applied to the following:
•
Warranty or RMA items
•
Access cards and transmitters
•
Job site deliveries1
1. You must have prior approval for any job site delivery contact your Regional Sales Manager. Job site must have
the capability to unload the shipment. Any additional fees
(lift truck, residential delivery fees, etc.) imposed by the
freight company are the responsibility of the buyer and
these fees will be charged back to the buyer.

DoorKing will not drop ship (includes 3rd Party Shipments) to
DIY consumers who have purchased our products direct
from internet web sites (see Authorized Distributors and
Dealers).

3rd Party Shipments (drop ship policy applies)
All third party shipments are FOB, Inglewood, California,
freight collect (this means that the buyer is responsible
for all freight charges). DoorKing will not file any claims
for shortages, loss or damage on behalf of the Buyer for
Buyers who use their own transportation services, or
who contract with a third party transportation service for
shipment of goods. Any additional fees imposed by the
transportation company are the responsibility of the
Buyer. Furthermore, DoorKing will not replace any
product because of shortages, loss or damage, and will
not prepay any shipping charges for any shipment by a
third party carrier.

Terms and Conditions of Sale

Rev 1-7-19

Fees
Handling: $5.00 handling/insurance fee per package is
charged on all FedEx, UPS and U.S. Postal Service
shipments (fee includes insurance).
Fed-Ex Pick-up: $5.00 pick-up fee per package for all
shipments requested by the buyer to be shipped via
FedEx (this fee applies to FedEx shipments only). This is
a fee that FedEx imposes on DoorKing and buyer agrees
to reimburse DoorKing for this fee.
Correction: Any FedEx or UPS shipment that is dropped
shipped per Buyer’s instructions, and the drop ship
address is incorrect in any way, Buyer is responsible for,
and agrees to reimburse DoorKing for, any correction
fees that are assessed to DoorKing by the shipping
company.
LTL Handling: $25.00 shipment fee is applied to all
common carrier LTL shipments. There are additional fees
that may be applicable and are beyond our control.
These fees include residential deliveries, waiting time, lift
gates, etc. We are not advised of these fees until after
the delivery is made. Fees of this nature will be charged
back to the consignee.
LTL Pickup: $50.00 LTL pick up fee is charged by the
carrier to DoorKing when DoorKing schedules a pick up at
the customer’s location. This fee is added to the freight
charges that apply.

Custom Orders
Contact the Sales Department for any custom orders (i.e.,
any order that requires us to produce / modify a standard
product to meet an individual customer’s requirements).
Written specification is required prior to our
manufacturing any custom order. Once manufacturing
of a custom order has started, the order cannot be
cancelled. Buyer indemnifies DoorKing and its officers
and employees from any liabilities, obligations, claims,
actions, suits, penalties, costs and expense (including
costs of defense) arising from the modification. Custom
orders cannot be returned for credit under any
circumstances.
IMPORTANT!!
There is a $240.00 set-up fee plus $240.00 per hour shop
labor charge for machine time, in addition to the cost of
the part, for those custom orders that require machine
shop alterations (e.g., special size V-wheels).

Special Orders
Contact our Order Entry Department to place any special
order (i.e., any order being a particular one pertaining to
a particular instance). Special orders include any
products that we do not normally carry in our finished
goods inventory, or are orders that we have to order as
special from our vendors. Special orders may carry
additional fees that are applied to the cost of the item, so
it is always best to check with our Order Entry and/or
Sales Departments regarding the price of a special order.

Special cards and card codes and AVI readers are an
example of (but not limited to) a special order. In the
case of special type cards and/or special card codes
(particular sequenced numbers, special artwork, etc.),
there is a minimum order of 100 cards. Contact DoorKing
for any card requiring special artwork and/or encoding as
additional fees will be applied to the cost of the cards.
Special orders cannot be returned for credit.

Warranty Claims
Warranty claims are handled strictly through our RMA
Department. Please contact an RMA Department staff
member before ordering any replacement items or
products. We offer advance shipment for exchange parts
so the customer does not suffer lost time waiting for the
defective to be returned to us. It is not allowed to place
a new item order when attempting to resolve warranty
issues with our products. We support our products by
providing an exchange for the defective internal part of a
larger product; we do not replace entire main product
assemblies. rma@doorking.com
The repair or replacement of products or parts is subject
to the terms of our warranty policies.

Returns
DoorKing will accept returns for justifiable reasons
according to our judgment. Non-defective products
returned for restock must be returned unused,
unblemished and in the original packaging to be
considered for credit. All returns must be sent freight
prepaid and accompanied by an RMA number, or they
may be refused. Cost for repairs and/or missing parts will
be deducted from the credit allowance.
Restocking fees will be waived for returns with an original
invoice date less than thirty (30) days old. A 15%
restocking fee will be assessed on all returns with an
original invoice date greater than thirty (30) days, but less
than ninety (90) days old. In addition, cost for repairs
and/or missing parts will be deducted from the credit
allowance.
Any product that was purchased from DoorKing with an
original invoice date of 90 days ago or more cannot be
returned for credit under any circumstances.
Any product that has been installed, or shows signs of
being installed, or has been subject to abuse, or has been
modified in any way, cannot be returned for credit.
Under these circumstances, DoorKing will make every
attempt to repair and/or restore the product to a “like
new” condition, and will return the product to the
customer, with applicable charges (missing parts,
packaging, labor, etc.) being applied.

Page 3

Rev 1-7-19

Terms and Conditions of Sale

Substitutes
DoorKing reserves the right to alter its product
specifications at any time, and reserves the right to
furnish suitable substitute components or materials for
any reason. DoorKing assumes no liability for deviation
from its published specifications, including, but not
limited to, dimensions and/or descriptive information
not essential to the proper operation of the product.

Force Majeure
We maintain a large finished goods inventory on our
most popular items. We will make every effort to ship
your order as soon as possible, typically within 24-hours
after the order is received. However, there are times
when orders may be delayed because of large influxes of
orders, delay in shipments of raw materials by our
suppliers, or other circumstances beyond our control
including: weather, acts of God, riots, civil commotion,
embargoes, wars, hostilities, disturbances, unsettled
international conditions, and any strike, work stoppage,
slowdown, lockout or any other labor-related dispute
involving or affecting any of our suppliers. DoorKing shall
not be held liable for any loss, damage or delay in delivery
of goods due to such acts and circumstances.

Unenforceable Provision
The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of
these Terms and Conditions of Sale will not affect the
other provisions hereof. If any provision of these Terms
and Conditions of Sale is found to be invalid or
unenforceable, then the remainder shall have full force
and effect, and the invalid provision shall be partially
enforced to the maximum extent permitted by law to
effectuate the purpose of the Terms and Conditions of
Sale.

Governing Law
These Terms and Conditions of Sale shall be governed by,
and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of the State
of California, and shall be deemed to have been executed
in Inglewood, California. Buyer and Seller agree that the
courts of the State of California and/or the United States
District Court for the Central District of California shall
have exclusive jurisdiction over any litigation arising
between Seller and Buyer, and the parties hereby agree
to submit themselves to the personal jurisdiction of said
courts.

Repairs
All repairs must be issued an RMA number before they
can be returned to DoorKing. Repairs that are returned
without prior authorization are subject to lengthy delays.
Prior to returning any item to DoorKing, please contact
our RMA department for an RMA number and have the
following information available: the model number of

Page 4

the product and the circuit board number, the serial
number, and the revision letter.
Standard flat rate repair charges that are listed on the
following pages apply only to products manufactured by
DoorKing that are beyond the warranty period and
became defective because of random component failure.
Standard flat rate repair charges apply only to products
that are returned to DoorKing for repair and return. The
standard flat rate repair charge does not apply to
products that are returned under an advance
replacement RMA.
The standard repair charges do not apply to products or
parts that are deemed by DoorKing to be un-repairable
because of vandalism, abuse, improper installation
including connection to an improper voltage source,
power surges, lightning damage or natural disasters.
Additional repair charges will be assessed to replace
missing parts or parts damaged beyond repair. Boards
that are deemed to be beyond repair will be returned to
the owner or scrapped upon written authorization from
the owner.

Repair Warranty
Circuit boards repaired by DoorKing are warranted for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date of repair. This
warranty covers bench repairs only. For this warranty to
be in effect, any product or parts must be returned to
DoorKing freight prepaid. DoorKing is not responsible for
any cost incurred involving on-site service calls, or labor
charges incurred in the removal or replacement of any
parts. This warranty does not apply to products or parts
damaged because of vandalism, abuse, improper
installation including connection to an improper voltage
source, power surges, lightning damage or natural
disasters.

Advance Replacements
Defective or un-used parts that have been advanced to
you must be returned to DoorKing within thirty (30) days
from the date of the advance replacement invoice.
Not all circuit boards are available for advance
replacement. Advance replacement boards are not
guaranteed to be available. You must know the serial
number and the revision level of the board that you are
requesting an advance replacement for prior to our
shipping an advance replacement board to you. Out of
warranty advance replacement repair charges are billed
at a higher rate than the standard flat rate repair and
return charge.

Terms and Conditions of Sale

Obsolete Board Repair
(Upgrade) Information

Rev 1-7-19

and

Replacement

Many early model circuit boards are not available for
advance replacement and cannot be repaired. These
boards are identified in the tables in Section A5 of this
price schedule.
Upgrade: The upgrade option allows you to replace an
old circuit board with a new current production circuit
board at a reduced rate. When choosing this option, the
upgrade charge includes any additional parts required to
install the new circuit board into the telephone entry /
access control system. The upgrade option also carries a
two-year warranty on the circuit board.
If you choose the upgrade option as an advance
replacement, the reduced rate upgrade charge will not
be applicable until the replaced circuit board and
memory chips are returned to DoorKing. Otherwise, you
will be responsible for payment in full of the new circuit
board and memory chips sent to you under the advance
replacement program.

Shipping Charges
DoorKing pays UPS ground shipping charges one way only
on warranty advance replacement items. If any other
means of shipping (UPS red, blue, etc.) is requested, you
are responsible for the difference between that method
and UPS ground charges. Shipping charges for the return
of advance replacement items are the responsibility of
the customer. All shipping charges for non-warranty
repair items are the responsibility of the customer.

Page 5

Rev 1-7-19

Page 6

Terms and Conditions of Sale

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Section A1
This Price Schedule is effective January 7, 2019.

Vehicular Traffic Control
Date

Page

Comment

1-2-19

All

January, 2019 Price Schedule update.

1-16-19

30

Removed partial open bullet point.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 1

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Solar Tax Credit
Homeowners who purchase a solar powered gate operator manufactured by DoorKing, Inc. after December 31, 2008,
may qualify for a 30% Federal Tax Credit off the installed cost of the system. This tax credit is available for the installed
cost of the solar powered gate operator on the homeowner’s Federal tax return.
The 30% Investment Tax Credit (ITC) for residential and commercial solar systems will expire on December 31, 2019, the ITC
then steps down to 26 percent in 2020 and 22 percent in 2021. After 2021, the residential credit will drop to zero while the
commercial and utility credit will drop to a permanent 10 percent. Commercial and utility projects which have commenced
construction before December 31, 2021 may still qualify for the 30, 26 or 22 percent ITC if they are placed in service before
December 31, 2023. The Treasury and IRS are currently drafting guidance which will inform solar developers of which
percentage of ITC they will qualify for depending on when they started their project.
The solar powered Gate Operator is considered a "Qualified Solar Electric Property" authorized by the Internal Revenue
Code Section 25D under the definition provided in paragraph d.2 and as such qualifies for the Residential Energy Efficient
Tax Credit. You will need to complete Federal Form 5695 and attach it to your personal tax return in order to claim this
credit. If you have any questions regarding this Federal Tax Credit, Form 5695 or its instructions, please consult your tax
adviser. You should also check with your state tax agency to see if your state offers any additional solar energy tax
incentives.
What is Covered:
The solar system tax credit applies to the total installed cost of the solar gate operator system. This includes the related
solar panel, gate operator, solar control box, access control device, remote controls, obstruction detection device(s), etc.
DoorKing Model 6005 Swing Gate Actuator (P/N 6005‐380)*
DoorKing Model 6006 Swing Gate Actuator (P/N 6006‐380)*
DoorKing Model 6004 Swing Gate Operator (P/N 6004‐380)*
DoorKing Model 6400 Swing Gate Operator (P/N 6400‐380)*
* To qualify, must be installed with 4302‐313, 4302‐314 or 4302‐315 Solar Control Box
DoorKing Model 6524-381 Swing Gate Operator
DoorKing Model 9024-381 Slide Gate Operator
DoorKing Solar Kit (P/N 2000-070)
DoorKing Solar Panel (P/N 2000‐076 or 2600‐077)
Batteries; two (2) 18 Amp Hour (P/N 1801‐004) or two (2) 35 Amp Hour (P/N 1801‐005)
What is Not Covered:
The cost of the gate itself, or work required to place the physical gate into proper working order (leveling, replacing hinges,
etc.).

Qualifications:
•

The installation of a DoorKing Solar Powered Gate System

•

Effective for tax years beginning after December 31, 2008

•

Homeowners will need to use The Federal Tax Credit form 5695, Residential Energy Efficient Property Credit

•

Homeowners will need to provide a copy of the "Manufacturer's Certification for Credit"

•

The dwelling must be located in the United States and used as a residence by the taxpayer

•

This offer is only available in the United States

Page 2

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

UL 325 – August 2018 Update
Requirements mandated by the safety standard (UL 325) that DKS gate operators are listed to require that photo-beams
and contact edges used for entrapment protection must be monitored. Entrapment protection must be provided for the
gate system where the risk of entrapment exist. The gate operator will not run without one or more external entrapment
protection devices installed in each direction of travel. Check the gate operator installation manual for a list of external
entrapment protection devices that can be used with DKS gate operator products.
The August 2018 update to the safety standard requires that a minimum of two (2) independent means of entrapment
protection must be provided in each direction of travel where the risk of entrapment exists. The inherent system in DKS
gate operators is active in both directions of travel, so this qualifies as one means of entrapment protection in each
direction. The second means will be an external device, such as a non-contact (Type B1) or a contact (Type B2) sensor as
required in each direction. The actual number of external devices required is dependent on the gate system layout and
the number of entrapment areas that will need to be protected. Installers will have to identify all potential areas where
the risk of entrapment exist and how best to protect those areas. For example, some gates may require two (or more)
external devices in each direction of travel to protect all potential areas of entrapment. The standard also mandates that
all components used for monitoring purposes for external devices must be factory installed internally within the device.
There is an exception for swing gates and vertical lift gates regarding the minimum of two entrapment protection devices
in each direction of travel. For example, if on a swing gate system there is no potential for entrapment in the opening
direction, then only the close direction will require a minimum of two means of entrapment protection. Installers will have
to determine if any entrapment hazards exist in the opening direction, and if so, then those areas will have to be protected
with external devices.
Vertical lift gates require two means of entrapment protection in the down cycle, but will only require one means of
entrapment protection in the up cycle. The model 1175 is considered to be a vertical lift gate operator for entrapment
protection means requirements.
Barrier gate operators that are installed in such a way that the barrier arm does not come closer than 16 inches to a rigid
object are not required to protect against entrapment.
The table below shows the minimum entrapment protection requirements for each type of gate operator in the scope of
the UL 325 Standard for Safety.

Opening

Closing

Horizontal Slide Gate

2

2

Horizontal Swing Gate

2*

2*

Vertical Pivot Gate

2

2

Vertical Lift gate

1

2

* For a horizontal swing gate operator, at least two independent entrapment protection means are required in each
direction of travel. Except, if there is no entrapment zone in one direction of travel, only one means of entrapment
protection is required in that direction of travel; however, the other direction must have two independent entrapment
protection means.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 3

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Blank Page

Page 4

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Table of Contents
Overhead / Barrier Gate Operators / Traffic Spike Systems
Model 1175 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Model 1601 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Model 1602 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10
Model 1603 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 12
Traffic Control Spikes .............................................................................................................................................................. 14
Warning Signs / Traffic Signals ................................................................................................................................................ 15
Overhead / Barrier Gate Operator Parts ................................................................................................................................. 16

Swing Gate Operators
Model 6005, 6006, 6004, 6400 ............................................................................................................................................... 18
Model 6050 / 6100 ................................................................................................................................................................. 20
Model 6300 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Model 6500 / 6550 ................................................................................................................................................................. 24
Model 6524 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 26
Swing Gate Accessories........................................................................................................................................................... 28
Swing Gate Operator Parts ..................................................................................................................................................... 29

Slide Gate Operators
Model 9000 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Model 9024 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 32
Model 9050 / 9100 ................................................................................................................................................................. 34
Model 9150 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 36
Slide Gate Accessories ............................................................................................................................................................ 38
Slide Gate Operator Parts ....................................................................................................................................................... 40

Entrapment Protection
Entrapment Protection Devices Non-Contact Type B1 ........................................................................................................... 42
Entrapment protection Devices Contact Type B2 ................................................................................................................... 43

Vehicle Detection
Loop Detectors and Loops ...................................................................................................................................................... 44

Accessories
Control Stations ...................................................................................................................................................................... 45

Back-up Power Inverters
Model 1000 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 46

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 5

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1175 Overhead Operator

Indoor Use Only

1175
•

Adjustable Limits

•

Steel Frame

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

#40 Roller Chain

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

Heavy-duty 3-in (76.2 mm) Rails

•

Gate Tracker Data Output

•

Up to 14 Ft (4.27 m) high gate

19.75
501.65 mm

9.00
228.6 mm

Rear View

Model

Maximum
Gate Height

Overall
Length

8 Ft

12.25 Ft

10 Ft

14.25 Ft

12 Ft

16.25 Ft

14 Ft

18.25 Ft

2.43 m

1175

3.05 m
3.66 m
4.27 m

Side View

Mount
Options1

Class of
Operation2

Voltage

HP

Power
Outlets

Maximum
Cycles / Day

Loop
Ports3

Adjustable
Clutch4

Ceiling

II, III, IV

115 VAC

1/2

N/A

Continuous

2

No

3.73 m
4.34 m
4.95 m
5.56 m

1.

If the operator is mounted less than 8 feet above the ground, the optional powerhead cover (1175-020) is required.

2.

II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access.

3.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

4.

Operator is equipped with a Type A inherent detection system.

Page 6

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

1175 Overhead Operator

Indoor Use Only

Powerhead Assembly

Backup Power Inverters

1175-380 .................................................................... 2096.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

Optional Powerhead Cover

Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit ................................ 270.00

1175-020 ...................................................................... 318.00
Required if powerhead assembly is mounted less than 8 feet (2.43m)
above the ground.

Rail Assembly
1150-225 (8 ft. high gate) ............................................ 884.00
1150-226 (10 ft. high gate)........................................... 964.00
1150-227 (12 ft. high gate)......................................... 1236.00
1150-228 (14 ft. high gate)......................................... 1308.00
Entrapment Protection (required)
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.
Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Loops and Loop Detectors
See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

Surge Suppression
1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 7

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1601 Barrier Gate Operator

Magnetic Limits

1601
•

Magnetic Limits

•

Built-in power and operate switches

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Two convenience outlets

•

Gate Tracker Data Output

•

Left or right hand mount

•

Up input memory buffer

•

Galvanized steel housing

•

Down memory buffer

•

90° in approximately 1.5 sec.

15.25

14.75

387.35 mm

374.65 mm

39.50
1003.30 mm

9 ft
10 ft
12 ft
14 ft

1601-08x / 1601-18x

Model1

1601

Mount
Options

Left or
Right

Class of
Operation2

II, III, IV

(2.75 m)
(3.00 m)
(3.65 m)
(4.26 m)

1620-08x

Voltage3

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

HP

1/2

Power
Outlets

2

Cycles /
Day

Continuous

Loop
Ports4

2

Arm Type5

Maximum
Length

Fold
Option6

Breakaway
Option

Lighted
Option5

Aluminum

14 Ft.
4.27 m

Yes

Yes

Yes

Wood

14 Ft.
4.27 m

Yes

No

No

Plastic

12 Ft.
3.66 m

Yes

No

No

1.

1601 is available with white housing (1601-08x) or gray housing (1601-18x). Gray housing includes stainless steel door.

2.

II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access.

3.

High voltage kit (P/N 2600-266) required for 208 Volt and higher.

4.

Plug-in loop detector ports; up loop and down loop. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

5.

Always use lighted aluminum arm when using the lane barrier (1620-08x) add-on option.

6.

Maximum arm length using the fold option is 12 Ft. (3.66 m).

Page 8

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

1601 Barrier Gate Operator

Magnetic Limits

Choose an Operator

Aluminum Arm – Standard

1601-080 1/2 HP White Housing ................................ 3322.00

1601-242 Hardware Kit - Required ............................... 172.00

1601-081 1/2 HP

w/COO1

White Housing .................. 4312.00

1601-180 1/2 HP Gray Housing .................................. 3690.00

Choose one arm from below

1601-516 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m) ....................................... 324.00

Housing..................... 4432.00

1601-524 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m), 2-Piece1......................... 392.00

1. Convenience Open Option provides a method to raise the arm when
AC power has failed.

1601-610 Arm Folding 12 Ft (3.66 m) ........................... 532.00

High Voltage

Aluminum Arm – LED Lighted

2600-266 High Voltage Kit............................................ 640.00

1601-242 Hardware Kit - Required ............................... 172.00

1601-181 1/2 HP

w/COO1 Gray

Allows the operator to be powered from 208, 230, 460 or 575 VAC
source voltage.

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.

1. Ships in 7-ft (2.13 m) long box to reduce shipping cost.

1601-535 Power Harness – Required ........................... 164.00
Choose one arm from below

1601-518 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m) Lighted........................... 580.00
1601-600 Arm Folding Lighted 12 Ft (3.66 m) ............ 1004.00
Aluminum Arm – Breakaway
1601-285 Breakaway Hardware Kit - Required............. 934.00

Loops and Loop Detectors
See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

Choose one arm from below

1601-522 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m) ....................................... 328.00
1601-528 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m), 2-Piece1......................... 430.00
1601-520 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m) Lighted........................... 580.00

Surge Suppression

1. Ships in 7-ft (2.13 m) long box to reduce shipping cost.

1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00
Wood Arm
Backup Power Inverters

1601-240 Hardware Kit - Required ............................... 144.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

Choose one arm from below

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit................................ 270.00
Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

Accessories
1601-281 Arm Hub Cover White1 ................................... 95.42
1601-283 Arm Hub Cover Gray1 ..................................... 95.42
1603-210 Traffic Signal & Mount Kit .......................... 1096.00
1601-092 Heater Kit2 .................................................... 270.00
1601-093 Fan Kit3 ......................................................... 270.00
1601-270 Manual Crank Kit.......................................... 278.00

1601-348 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m) ....................................... 256.00
1601-384 Arm Folding 12 Ft (3.66 m) ........................... 442.00
Plastic Arm
1601-241 Hardware Kit - Required ............................... 144.00
Choose one arm from below

1601-571 Arm 12 Ft (3.66 m) ....................................... 150.00
1601-383 Arm Folding 12 Ft (3.66 m) ........................... 442.00
Lane Barrier Add-On1
1620-080 9 ft (2.75 m) opening width ..................... 27,052.00

1. Arm hub cover is included with the 1601 operator. Shown here for
replacement purposes only.

1620-081 10 ft (3.00 m) opening width ................... 27,682.00

2. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

1620-085 14 ft (4.26 m) opening width ................... 29,992.00

3. Use in hot, humid environments.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

1620-083 12 ft (3.65 m) opening width ................... 29,258.00
1. Requires 1601 operator, 1601-242 hardware kit, 1601-535 power
harness and 1601-518 arm – not included in the lane barrier pricing.
For passenger cars and light trucks only.

Page 9

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1602 Barrier Gate Operator

Magnetic Limits

1602
•

Magnetic Limits

•

Built-in power and operate switches

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Two convenience outlets

•

Gate Tracker Data Output

•

Left or right hand mount

•

Up input memory buffer

•

Galvanized steel housing

•

Down memory buffer

•

90° in approximately 5.5 sec.

15.25

15.75

387.35 mm

400.05 mm

39.50
1003.30 mm

34.50
876.30 mm

Model

Mount
Options

Left or
Right

1602

Class of
Operation1

II, III, IV

Voltage2

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

HP

Power
Outlets

Cycles /
Day

Loop
Ports3

Arm Type

Aluminum
1

2

Continuous

2

Wood

1.

II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access.

2.

High voltage kit (P/N 2600-266) required for 208 Volt and higher.

3.

Plug-in loop detector ports; up loop and down loop. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

Page 10

Maximum
Length

Fold
Option

Breakaway
Option

Lighted
Option

20 Ft.
6.09 m

No

No

Yes

24 Ft.
7.31 m

No

No

Yes

27 Ft.
8.23 m

No

No

Yes

20 Ft.
6.09 m

No

No

No

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

1602 Barrier Gate Operator

Magnetic Limits

Choose an Operator

Aluminum Arms

1602-090 1 HP............................................................ 4912.00

1602-162 3-Piece, 20 Ft (6.09 m) ............................... 3604.00

1602-091 1 HP

w/COO1

.............................................. 5902.00

1602-164 3-Piece, 24 Ft (7.31 m) ............................... 3768.00

1. Convenience Open Option provides a method to raise the arm when
AC power has failed.

1602-166 3-Piece, 27 Ft (8.23 m) ............................... 3876.00

High Voltage
2600-266 High Voltage Kit ........................................... 640.00
Allows the operator to be powered from 208, 230, 460 or 575 VAC
source voltage.

Aluminum Arms – LED Lighted
1602-172 3-Piece, 20 Ft (6.09 m) ............................... 3952.00
1602-174 3-Piece, 24 Ft (7.31 m) ............................... 4188.00
1602-176 3-Piece, 27 Ft (8.23 m) ............................... 4350.00

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices

Wood Arm

Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices. See pages 40-41 for a complete list of all
entrapment protection devices available.

1602-041 Hardware Kit - Required ............................. 1012.00

1602-340 3-Piece, 20 Ft (6.09 m) ................................. 554.00

Loops and Loop Detectors
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.

Surge Suppression
1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00
Backup Power Inverters
1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00
1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit ............................... 270.00
Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

Accessories
1603-210 Traffic Signal & Mount Kit .......................... 1096.00
1601-092 Heater Kit1.................................................... 270.00
1601-093 Fan Kit2 ......................................................... 270.00
1602-170 Manual Crank Kit.......................................... 470.00
1. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).
2. Use in hot, humid environments.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 11

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1603 Barrier Gate / Auto-Spikes

Magnetic Limits

1603
•

Magnetic Limits

•

Built-in power and operate switches

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Two convenience outlets

•

Gate Tracker Data Output

•

Left or right hand mount

•

Up input memory buffer

•

Galvanized steel housing

•

Down memory buffer

•

90° in approximately 1.5 sec.

15.25

15.50

387.35 mm

393.70 mm

18.00

36.00

7.00

457.20 mm

914.40 mm

177.80 mm

43.50
1104.90 mm

38.50
977.90 mm

20.00
508.00 mm

2.00
50.80 mm

Model

Mount
Options

Left or
Right

1603

Class of
Operation1

II, III, IV

Voltage2

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

HP

1/2

Power
Outlets

2

Cycles /
Day

Continuous

1.

II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access.

2.

High voltage kit (P/N 2600-266) required for 208 Volt and higher.

Loop
Ports3

2

Arm Type

Maximum
Length

Fold
Option4

Breakaway
Option

Lighted
Option

Aluminum

14 Ft.
4.27 m

Yes

Yes

Yes

Wood

14 Ft.
4.27 m

Yes

No

No

Plastic

12 Ft.
3.66 m

Yes

No

No

3.

Plug-in loop detector ports; up loop and down loop. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

4.

Maximum arm length using the fold option is 12 Ft. (3.66 m).

Page 12

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

1603 Barrier Gate / Auto-Spikes

Magnetic Limits

Choose an Operator

Aluminum Arm – Standard

1603-180 1/2 HP ........................................................ 4756.00

1601-242 Hardware Kit - Required ............................... 172.00

1603-181 1/2 HP

w/COO1

.......................................... 5742.00

1. Convenience Open Option provides a method to raise the arm when
AC power has failed.

Choose one arm from below

1601-516 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m) ....................................... 324.00
1601-524 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m), 2-Piece1......................... 392.00
1601-610 Arm Folding 12 Ft (3.66 m) ........................... 532.00

High Voltage

1. Ships in 7-ft (2.13 m) long box to reduce shipping cost.

2600-266 High Voltage Kit ........................................... 640.00
Allows the operator to be powered from 208, 230, 460 or 575 VAC
source voltage.

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices

Aluminum Arm – LED Lighted
1601-242 Hardware Kit - Required ............................... 172.00
1601-535 Power Harness – Required ........................... 164.00
Choose one arm from below

Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.

1601-600 Arm Folding Lighted 12 Ft (3.66 m) ............ 1004.00

Loops and Loop Detectors

Spike Components

See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

1603-168 Drive Ext 18 in (457 mm) - Required .......... 1134.00

1601-518 Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m) Lighted........................... 580.00

Choose spike components from below

1603-165 Spike Section 3 Ft (0.91 m) ......................... 2022.00
Warning Sign - Required

1603-170 Tunnel Extension 18 in (457 mm) ............... 1134.00

1615-081 Auto-Spike Warning Sign............................ 1166.00

1610-240 End Cap ........................................................ 446.00

Illuminated warning sign MUST be used with the auto-spike system.
Warning sign mounts on a 3.5 in (89 mm) post.

Traffic Signal - Recommended
1603-210 .................................................................... 1096.00

Accessories
1601-281 Arm Hub Cover1.............................................. 95.42
1615-081 Warning Sign2 ............................................. 1166.00
1603-210 Traffic Signal & Mount Kit .......................... 1096.00
1601-092 Heater Kit3 .................................................... 270.00

Surge Suppression

1601-093 Fan Kit4 ......................................................... 270.00

1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00

1601-270 Manual Crank Kit .......................................... 278.00
1. Arm hub cover is included with the 1603 operator. Shown here for
replacement purposes only.

Backup Power Inverters
1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00
1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit ............................... 270.00
Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

2. Warning sign advises drivers that a one-way lane condition exist and
must be installed with the auto-spike system.
3. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).
4. Use in hot, humid environments.

Page 13

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Model 1610
Stand-Alone Traffic Control Spikes

7.00
177.8 mm

36.00

7.00

36.00

914.4 mm

177.8 mm

914.4 mm

7.00
177.8 mm

20.00

20.00

508.0 mm

508.0 mm

2.00

2.00

50.8 mm

50.8 mm

SURFACE MOUNT SPIKE ASSEMBLY

SPIKE EXTENSION

20.00
508.0 mm

2.00
50.8 mm

END CAP

72.00

12.00

72.00

1.83 m

304.8 mm

1.83 m

10.00

254 mm

2.00
50.8 mm

6.00 152.4 mm
FLUSH MOUNT SPIKES

SPEED BUMP

Surface Mount Spikes

Flush Mount Spikes

1610-088 Assembly .................................................... 3252.00

1610-080 Spring Retraction ........................................1626.00

1610-087 Extension .................................................... 2290.00

1610-090 Spring Retraction HD1 .................................1926.00

1610-240 End Cap......................................................... 446.00

1610-081 Weighted Retraction...................................1626.00

1610-010 Lock Down Tool ............................................ 170.00

1610-091 Weighted Retraction HD1............................1926.00

•

Surface mount spikes use spring retraction and have a
lock down feature (requires 1610-010).

•

1610-088 assembly includes one (1) 1610-087 and two
(2) 1610-240.

Speed Bump
1610-150 Speed Bump ................................................. 390.00

Flush Mount Spikes with Lock-Down Feature
1610-082 Spring Retraction2 .......................................1896.00
1610-092 Spring Retraction HD1, 2 ...............................2196.00
1610-083 Weighted Retraction3 .................................1896.00
1610-093 Weighted Retraction HD1, 3 .........................2196.00
1. HD = Heavy-duty, ¼ in (6 mm) top plate.
2. Includes 1610-012 lock-down tool.

Warning Sign - Required
1615-080 Warning Sign .............................................. 1166.00
•

Warning signs are mandatory when spike systems are
installed. See next page for more options.

3. Includes 1610-013 lock-down tool

Replacement Lock-Down Tools
1610-012 Use with Spring Retraction spikes...................84.28
1610-013 Use with Weighted Retraction spikes ...........138.00

Page 14

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

Traffic Control
Warning Sign, Traffic Signal

24.00
609.6 mm

24.00

24.00

8.00

609.6 mm

609.6 mm

203.2 mm

STOP

WRONG WAY

MAXIMUM

STOP

5 MPH

SEVERE TIRE
DAMAGE

Exceeding 5 MPH Will Result
In Severe Tire Damage!

Bicycles or
NO: Pedestrians,
Motorcycles.

Pedestrians, Bicycles or
NO: Motorcycles.

1615-080 Red Side

1615-080 Green Side

9.75

14.00

247.6 mm

355.6 mm

PROCEED ONLY WHEN
SPIKES ARE DOWN
Proceeding Before Spikes Are Down
Will Result In Severe Tire Damage
!

Pedestrians, Bicycles or
NO: Motorcycles.

1615-081 Red Both Sides

RED
20.00
508 mm

GREEN

1603-208

Illuminated Warning Signs

Traffic Signal

1615-080.................................................................... 1166.00

1603-208 ...................................................................... 932.00

1615-082 (Spanish) .................................................... 1166.00

1603-2101................................................................... 1096.00

•

Use these signs with surface and flush mount spike
systems. Signs mount on a 3.5 in (89 mm) post.

1. Same as 1603-208 with mounting post kit for the 1603 auto-spike system.

Replacement Components
Illuminated Auto-Spike Warning Sign

1603-550 LED Bulb, 10W, 1300 Lumens......................... 27.52

1615-081.................................................................... 1166.00
•

Use this sign with the 1603 auto-spike system. Sign
mounts on a 3.5 in (89 mm) post.

Replacement Components
1615-022 LED T8 Tube, 12W, 700 Lumens..................... 73.08
1615-023 LED Flood Lamp, 9W, 655 Lumens ............... 128.00
1615-032 RED panel..................................................... 144.00
1615-034 GREEN panel ................................................ 144.00
1615-035 RED Auto-spike panel .................................. 144.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 15

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Overhead / Barrier Operator Parts & Replacement Items
Miscellaneous Parts & Accessories
Circuit Boards

Barrier Operator Replacement Parts

1601-010 ...................................................................... 638.00

1601-281 ........................................................................ 95.42

Used in models 1601, 1602 and 1603

Barrier arm hub cover - white

4405-018 ...................................................................... 638.00

1601-283 ........................................................................ 95.42

Used in model 1175

Barrier arm hub cover - gray

1473-121 Convenience Open kit................................... 348.00

2599-101 ........................................................................ 21.34

Used in pre-2016 models 1150, 1601, 1602 and 1603

Replacement Warning Sign
1601-069 ........................................................................ 42.14
Wood arm mounting bracket

Replacement Barrier Arms Yellow/Black Marking
(These arms ARE NOT MUTCD compliant)
1601-048 Wood Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m) ............................. 218.00
1601-084 Folding Wood Arm........................................ 412.00
1601-271 Plastic Arm 12 Ft (3.66 m)............................. 122.00
1601-083 Folding Plastic Arm ....................................... 412.00
1601-216 Aluminum Arm 14 Ft (4.27 m) ...................... 288.00
1601-310 Folding Aluminum Arm ................................. 506.00

1601-068 ........................................................................ 62.24
Plastic arm mounting bracket
1601-202 ........................................................................ 74.98
Aluminum arm mounting bracket
1601-079 ...................................................................... 144.00
Arm mounting hub
1801-009 ........................................................................ 91.52
12 Volt, 3 AH replacement battery

1602-040 3-Piece, 20 Ft (6.09 m) wood ........................ 452.00
1602-041 Hardware Kit for 1602-040 ......................... 1012.00

Warning Sign Replacement Components
1615-032 ...................................................................... 144.00
Warning sign replacement panel – RED
(use with 1610-080 warning sign)

Spike System Replacement Components
1610-031 ........................................................................ 12.04
Replacement spring for 1610-080 spike set
1610-030 ........................................................................ 31.30
Replacement spike for 1610-080 spike set

1615-034 ...................................................................... 144.00
Warning sign replacement panel – GREEN
(use with 1610-080 warning sign)
1615-035 ...................................................................... 144.00
Auto-spike warning sign replacement panel
(use with 1610-081 warning sign)

1610-035 ........................................................................ 31.30

1615-038 ...................................................................... 144.00

Replacement spike for 1610-083 spike set

Warning Sign panel – Entrapment Alert

1610-037 ........................................................................ 31.30
Spike spring lockdown assembly

1615-022 ........................................................................ 73.08

1610-045 ........................................................................ 30.34

T8 LED Tube Lamp, 12 Watt, 700 Lumens
(warning sign replacement bulbs)

Spike, weighted assembly

1615-023 ...................................................................... 128.00
LED Flood Lamp, 9 Watt, 655 Lumens
1603-550 ........................................................................ 27.52
LED Bulb 10W, 1300 Lumens
(traffic signal replacement bulb)

Page 16

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Blank Page

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 17

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

6005, 6003, 6004, 6400 Operators

Residential

Operators

Control Box

•

24 VDC continuous duty motor

•

115 VAC or 24 VDC / Solar input power

•

Built-in magnetic limit switches

•

Includes batteries

•

Slow-Start / Slow-Stop

•

Single and Dual (bi-parting) gate operation

•

Small, compact designs

•

18 Ah or 35 Ah battery options

Maximum Cycles on Backup Power2

Model

Max Gate
Weight1

Max Gate
Length1

Max Cycles
per Day2

3.5 Ah

18 Ah

35 Ah

6005

500 lbs. (227 kg)

14 ft. (4.26 m)

100

100

600

1200

6003

300 lbs. (136 kg)

10 ft. (3.05m)

100

100

600

1200

6004

500 lbs. (227 kg)

8 ft. (2.44 m)

100

100

600

1200

6400

300 lbs. (136 kg)

8 ft. (2.44 m)

100

100

600

1200

1.

Assumes gate to be in good condition and swinging in a level plane.

2.

Cycles shown are for single operators when solar panel(s) are not providing a charge to the batteries. Actual number of cycles will vary depending
on usage, accessories connected, gate weight, operating condition of gate, temperature, geographic location, weather (cloud coverage) and
charge state of the batteries.

Page 18

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

6005, 6003, 6004, 6400 Operators

Residential

Actuators

115 VAC Control Box

6005-380 .................................................................... 1494.00

4302-311 Standard ....................................................... 830.00

6003-380 .................................................................... 1086.00

4302-312 Deluxe ........................................................ 1000.00
Both Include two (2) 3.5 Ah batteries

Operators
6004-380 Column Mount ........................................... 1626.00
6400-380 In-Ground................................................... 1806.00

Deluxe control box includes three (3) 115 VAC convenient outlets

Solar Control Box
4302-313 (No batteries) ............................................. 1000.00

Entrapment Protection (required)
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.
Actuator/Operator will not run without entrapment protection
device(s) connected to the controller board.

4302-314 (Two 18 Ah batteries) ................................. 1432.00
4302-315 (Two 35 Ah batteries) ................................. 1552.00
Solar Panels
2000-076 24-Volt, 20-Watt .......................................... 722.00
Use with 35 Ah batteries

Loops and Loop Detectors

2000-077 24-Volt, 10-Watt .......................................... 364.00

See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

Use with 18 Ah batteries

Flange Bearing Hinge

Batteries

1200-009 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 152.00

1801-009 12-volt, 3.5 Ah ................................................ 91.52

Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with 2” (50.8 mm) gate frame.

Sealed Bearing Hinge
1200-019 2000 Lb. (907 kg) Weight Capacity ............... 152.00
1200-039 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 180.00
Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with round or square gate frames.

Torsion Rod Assembly

2000-110 Solar Panel Mount Bracket ............................. 61.72

1801-004 12-volt, 18 Ah ............................................... 218.00
1801-005 12-volt, 35 Ah ............................................... 278.00
Surge Suppression
1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00
Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Connection Cable
2600-755 30-Ft. (9.1 m)................................................ 218.00
2600-756 40-Ft. (12.2 m).............................................. 288.00

1203-084 ...................................................................... 348.00

2600-757 50-Ft. (15.2 m).............................................. 364.00

2600-299 Additional Torsion Rods ............................... 122.00

2600-754 500-Ft. (152.4 m)........................................ 2890.00

Counter-balances uphill swing gates, includes top bracket, bottom
bracket and one (1) torsion rod. Up to five (5) additional torsion rods
can be added.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

6050 / 6100 Swing Gate Operators

Automatic Magnetic Limits

6050 / 6100
•

Self-Adjusting Magnetic Limits

•

Polyurethane cover

•

Type A inherent reverse system

•

Galvanized steel frame

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Pad or Post mounted

•

Gate Tracker Data Output

•

Opens gate 90° in approximately 12 sec.

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

Magnetic lock output

•

Tamper protect feature

•

Overlap feature for bi-parting gates

13.50

23.00

13.50

23.00

342.90 mm

584.20 mm

342.90 mm

584.20 mm

11.00
279.40 mm

11.00
279.40 mm

10.50
266.70 mm

6.00 minimum

Post Mount

152.40 mm

Model

6050
6100

Maximum
Gate Weight
400 Lbs
181 KG

500 Lbs
226 KG

Maximum
Gate Length
10 Ft

3.05 m

14 Ft

4.26 m

Pad Mount

Mount
Options1

Class of
Operation2

Voltage

HP

Power
Outlets

Maximum
Cycles / Day

Loop
Ports4

Adjustable
Clutch5

Pad / Post

I

115 VAC

1/2 3

N/A

100

2

Yes

Pad / Post

I, II

115 VAC

1/2

N/A

Continuous

2

Yes

1.

Select pad or post mount hardware kit when ordering.

2.

I = Residential; II = Commercial.

3.

This is an intermittent duty cycle motor.

4.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

5.

Clutch is not applicable as an entrapment protection device.

Page 20

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

6050 / 6100 Swing Gate Operators

Automatic Magnetic Limits

Step 1: Choose an Operator or Operator Set

Backup Power Inverters

6050-380 Primary ...................................................... 2554.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

6050-381 Secondary .................................................. 1890.00

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit ................................ 270.00

Secondary operator includes 30 feet (9.1 m) of interconnection cable.

Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

6100-380 Primary ...................................................... 2804.00
6100-381 Secondary .................................................. 2144.00
Secondary operator includes 40 feet (12.2 m) of interconnection cable.

Step 2: Choose a Mounting Kit (Includes Arms)
2600-671 Pad Mount Kit .............................................. 554.00

Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Interconnection Cable
2600-755 30-Ft. (9.1 m)................................................ 218.00
2600-756 40-Ft. (12.2 m).............................................. 288.00
2600-757 50-Ft. (15.2 m).............................................. 364.00
2600-754 500-Ft. (152.4 m)........................................ 2890.00

2600-674 Post Mount Kit ............................................. 458.00
Flange Bearing Hinge
Step 3: Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices

1200-009 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 152.00

Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.

Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with 2” (50.8 mm) gate frame.

Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Sealed Bearing Hinge
1200-019 2000 Lb. (907 kg) Weight Capacity ............... 152.00

Loops and Loop Detectors

1200-039 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 180.00

See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with round or square gate frames.

Post Mount Base Plate

Uphill Arm Pivot Assembly

2600-664 ...................................................................... 212.00

6500-490 ...................................................................... 240.00

Use to mount 6050 and 6100 operators onto an existing concrete pad.

Use with 1203-084 Torsion Rod Assembly.

Surge Suppression
1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00
Heater Kit

Torsion Rod Assembly
1203-084 ...................................................................... 348.00
2600-299 Additional Torsion Rods ............................... 122.00
Counter-balances uphill swing gates, includes top bracket, bottom
bracket and one (1) torsion rod. Up to five (5) additional torsion rods
can be added.

1601-154 120 VAC ....................................................... 484.00
Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 21

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

6300 Swing Gate Operators

Automatic Magnetic Limits

6300
•

Self-Adjusting Magnetic Limits

•

Polyurethane cover

•

Type A inherent reverse system

•

Galvanized steel frame

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Pad or Post mounted

•

Gate Tracker Data Output

•

Opens gate 90° in approximately 16 sec.

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

Magnetic lock output

•

Tamper protect feature

•

Overlap feature for bi-parting gates

16.25

32.00

16.25

32.00

412.75 mm

812.80 mm

412.75 mm

812.80 mm

13.50
342.90 mm

13.50
342.90 mm

10.25
260.35 mm

7.00 minimum

Post Mount

177.80 mm

Model

6300

6300

Maximum
Gate Weight
700 Lbs
317 KG

800 Lbs
362 KG

Maximum
Gate Length
18 Ft

5.48 m

22 Ft

6.70 m

Pad Mount

Mount
Options1

Class of
Operation2

Voltage3

HP

Power
Outlets

Maximum
Cycles / Day

Loop
Ports3

Adjustable
Clutch4

Pad / Post

I, II, III, IV

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

1/2

2

Continuous

2

Yes

Pad / Post

I, II, III, IV

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

1

2

Continuous

2

Yes

1.

Select pad or post mount hardware kit when ordering.

2.

I = Residential; II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

3.

High voltage kit (P/N 2600-266) required for 208 Volt and higher.

4.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

5.

Clutch is not applicable as an entrapment protection device.

Page 22

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

6300 Swing Gate Operators

Automatic Magnetic Limits

Step 1: Choose an Operator or Operator Set

Backup Power Inverters

6300-380 Primary ½ HP.............................................. 3130.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

6300-381 Secondary ½ HP ......................................... 2528.00

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit ................................ 270.00

6300-384 Primary 1 HP .............................................. 3768.00

Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

6300-385 Secondary 1 HP .......................................... 3108.00
Secondary operators includes 50 feet (15.2 m) of interconnection cable.

High Voltage Kit

Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Interconnection Cable
2600-755 30-Ft. (9.1 m)................................................ 218.00
2600-756 40-Ft. (12.2 m).............................................. 288.00

2600-266 ...................................................................... 640.00

2600-757 50-Ft. (15.2 m).............................................. 364.00

Allows the operator to be powered from 208, 230, 460 or 575 VAC
source voltage. In dual gate applications, only one (1) kit is required.

2600-754 500-Ft. (152.4 m)........................................ 2890.00

Step 2: Choose a Mounting Kit (Includes Arms)
2600-264 Pad Mount Kit .............................................. 712.00

Flange Bearing Hinge
1200-009 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 152.00

2600-263 Post Mount Kit ............................................. 712.00

Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with 2” (50.8 mm) gate frame.

Step 3: Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices

Sealed Bearing Hinge

Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.

1200-019 2000 Lb. (907 kg) Weight Capacity ............... 152.00

Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Loops and Loop Detectors
See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

Surge Suppression
1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00

1200-039 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 180.00
Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with round or square gate frames.

Uphill Arm Pivot Assembly
6500-490 ...................................................................... 240.00
Use with 1203-084 Torsion Rod Assembly.

Torsion Rod Assembly
1203-084 ...................................................................... 348.00
2600-299 Additional Torsion Rods ............................... 122.00

Heater Kit
1601-154 120 VAC........................................................ 484.00

Counter-balances uphill swing gates, includes top bracket, bottom
bracket and one (1) torsion rod. Up to five (5) additional torsion rods
can be added.

1601-197 208 / 230 VAC ............................................ 1012.00
1601-198 460 VAC...................................................... 1012.00
Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 23

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

6500 / 65505 / 65555 Swing Gate Operators

Adjustable Limit Swing Gate Operators

6500 / 65505 / 65555
•

Adjustable Magnetic Limits

•

Polyurethane cover

•

Type A inherent reverse system

•

Galvanized steel frame

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Opens gate 90° in approximately 16 sec.

•

Gate Tracker Data Output

•

Magnetic lock output

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

Overlap feature for bi-parting gates

Model

6500

6500

65505

65554,5

Maximum
Gate Weight
700 Lbs
317 KG

800 Lbs

Maximum
Gate Length
18 Ft

5.48 m

22 Ft

362 KG

6.70 m

2000 Lbs

25 Ft

907 KG

2000 Lbs
907 KG

7.62 m

25 Ft

7.62 m

Mount

Class of
Operation1

Voltage2

HP

Power
Outlets

Maximum
Cycles / Day

Loop
Ports2

Adjustable
Clutch

Pad

I, II, III, IV

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

1/2

2

Continuous

2

No

Pad

I, II, III, IV

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

1

2

Continuous

2

No

Pad

II, III, IV

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

1

2

Continuous

2

No

Pad

II, III, IV

230 VAC

1

2

Continuous

2

No

1.

I = Residential; II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

High voltage kit (P/N 2600-266) required for 208 Volt and higher.

3.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

4.

This operator has a variable speed drive.

5.

Models 6550 and 6555 are not listed to the UL 325 standard at this time.

Page 24

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

6500 / 6550 / 6555 Swing Gate Operators

Adjustable Limit Swing Gate Operators

Step 1: Choose an Operator or Operator Set

Backup Power Inverters

6500-380 Primary ½ HP.............................................. 3928.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

6500-381 Secondary ½ HP ......................................... 3252.00

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit ................................ 270.00

Secondary operator includes 50 feet (15.2 m) of interconnection cable.

Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

6500-384 Primary 1 HP .............................................. 4490.00
6500-385 Secondary 1 HP .......................................... 3928.00
Secondary operator includes 50 feet (15.2 m) of interconnection cable.

6550-380 Primary 1 HP .............................................. 6178.00
6550-384 Secondary 1 HP .......................................... 5538.00
Secondary operator includes 50 feet (15.2 m) of interconnection cable.
Model 6550 is not listed to UL 325 at this time.

Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Interconnection Cable
2600-755 30-Ft. (9.1 m)................................................ 218.00
2600-756 40-Ft. (12.2 m).............................................. 288.00
2600-757 50-Ft. (15.2 m).............................................. 364.00
2600-754 500-Ft. (152.4 m)........................................ 2890.00
Flange Bearing Hinge

6555-381 Primary 1 HP 230 VAC Variable Speed ....... 8830.00
Model 6555 is not listed to UL 325 at this time.

1200-009 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 152.00
Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with 2” (50.8 mm) gate frame.

High Voltage Kit
2600-266 ...................................................................... 640.00
Allows the operator to be powered from 208, 230, 460 or 575 VAC
source voltage. In dual gate applications, only one (1) kit is required.
Not available on 6555-081 operator.

Sealed Bearing Hinge
1200-019 2000 Lb. (907 kg) Weight Capacity ............... 152.00
1200-039 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 180.00
Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with round or square gate frames.

Step 2: Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.

Uphill Arm Pivot Assembly

Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Use with 6500 operator and 1203-084 Torsion Rod Assembly.

Loops and Loop Detectors
See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

6500-490 ...................................................................... 240.00
6550-490 ...................................................................... 240.00
Use with 6550 operator and 1203-084 Torsion Rod Assembly.

Torsion Rod Assembly
1203-084 ...................................................................... 348.00

Surge Suppression
1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00

2600-299 Additional Torsion Rods ............................... 122.00
Counter-balances uphill swing gates, includes top bracket, bottom
bracket and one (1) torsion rod. Up to five (5) additional torsion rods
can be added.

Heater Kit
1601-154 120 VAC ....................................................... 484.00
1601-197 208 / 230 VAC ............................................ 1012.00
1601-198 460 VAC ..................................................... 1012.00
Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 25

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

6524 DC Swing Gate Operator

Adjustable Limit Swing Gate Operator

6524
•

Input 115/230 VAC or 24 VDC (Solar)

•

Built-in Battery Backup

•

Adjustable Magnetic Limits

•

Galvanized steel frame

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Opens gate 90° in approximately 16 sec.

•

Gate Tracker Data Output

•

Magnetic lock output

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

Overlap feature for bi-parting gates

31.63
803.40 mm

25.00
635.00 mm

18.38

22.00

466.85 mm

Model

6524
65245

Maximum
Gate Weight
800 Lbs
362 KG

800 Lbs
362 KG

Maximum
Gate Length
16 Ft

4.88 m

16 Ft

4.88 m

558.80 mm

Mount

Class of
Operation1

Voltage

HP

Power
Outlets

Maximum
Cycles / Day

Loop
Ports2

Adjustable
Clutch

Pad

I, II, III, IV

115/230
VAC

1/2

2

Continuous3,4

2

No

Pad

I, II, III, IV

24 VDC
(Solar)

1/2

0

Up to 1504

2

No

1.

I = Residential; II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

3.

Continuous operation is when AC power is present. Operation on battery backup (7.5 Ah batteries) is limited to approximately 40 cycles.

4.

Up to 150 cycles with 18 Ah batteries. Actual number of cycles will vary depending on usage, accessories connected, gate weight, operating
condition of gate, temperature and charge state of the batteries. Charge state of batteries is affected by geographical location of the product
when using solar to recharge the batteries.

5.

Solar powered operators will not support bi-parting (dual) gate operation.

Page 26

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

6524 DC Swing Gate Operators

Adjustable Limit Swing Gate Operator

Step 1: Choose an Operator

Backup Power Inverters

6524-380 115/230 VAC .............................................. 3508.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

Includes two 7.5 Ah batteries for limited backup operation. Order 18
Ah batteries to extend the backup operation cycles.

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit ................................ 270.00

Includes 50 feet (15 m) of RS 485 interconnection cable for bi-parting
(dual) gate operation.

Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

6524-381 24 VDC (Solar) ............................................ 3298.00

Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Interconnection Cable

24 VDC solar input power only (supply your own batteries and solar
charging system or use DKS solar kit).
Solar powered operators will not support bi-parting (dual) gate
operation.

2600-755 30-Ft. (9.1 m)................................................ 218.00
2600-756 40-Ft. (12.2 m).............................................. 288.00
2600-757 50-Ft. (15.2 m).............................................. 364.00
2600-754 500-Ft. (152.4 m)........................................ 2890.00

Step 2: Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.

Flange Bearing Hinge

Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with 2” (50.8 mm) gate frame.

Battery / Solar Options

Sealed Bearing Hinge

1801-004 12-Volt, 18 Ah Battery1 ................................ 218.00

1200-019 2000 Lb. (907 kg) Weight Capacity ............... 152.00

2000-077 24-Volt, 10 Watt Solar Panel ........................ 364.00

1200-039 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 180.00

2000-070 Solar Kit2 ...................................................... 850.00

Includes mounting bracket and hardware, two required per gate (top,
bottom), designed for use with round or square gate frames.

1. Two required for 24 Volt operation.
2. Kit includes two (2) 18 Ah batteries, 10 Watt solar panel and
bracket.

1200-009 3000 Lb. (1360 kg) Weight Capacity ............. 152.00

Uphill Arm Pivot Assembly
6500-490 ...................................................................... 240.00

Loops and Loop Detectors
See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

Surge Suppression
1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00

Use with 1203-084 Torsion Rod Assembly.

Torsion Rod Assembly
1203-084 ...................................................................... 348.00
2600-299 Additional Torsion Rods ............................... 122.00
Counter-balances uphill swing gates, includes top bracket, bottom
bracket and one (1) torsion rod. Up to five (5) additional torsion rods
can be added.

Heater Kit
6500-480 120 VAC ....................................................... 554.00

Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Interconnection Cable RS 485

1601-197 208 / 230 VAC ............................................ 1012.00

9024-136 50-Ft. (15 m)................................................... 42.00

Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C). Cannot be used
with solar powered operators.

9024-137 984-Ft. (300 m)............................................. 662.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 27

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Swing Gate Accessories
Hinges, Torsion Rod Counter-Balance
2.50

1.50

38 mm

4.00

4.50

2.75

114 mm

3.75

4.25

108 mm

4.50

1.50

38 mm

4.00

3.13

101 mm

79 mm

114 mm

101 mm

95 mm

70 mm

2-in
(51 mm)
Frame

1200-009

63 mm

2.88

73 mm

1200-010

1200-019

1200-039

1203-084

Flange Bearing Hinge

Torsion Rod Counter-Balance Assembly

1200-009 3000 Lb. (1360 Kg) weight capacity .............. 152.00

1203-0841 Torsion Rod Assembly .................................348.00

1200-010 Replacement bearing...................................... 91.74

2600-2992 Torsion Rods ................................................122.00

•

Designed for use with 2 inch (51 mm) gate frame.

•

Includes mounting bracket and hardware.

•

Zert grease fitting.

•

Two required (top, bottom) per gate.

1. Includes one (1) 2600-299 torsion rod.
2. Up to five (5) additional rods can be added to the 1203-084 assembly.

Sealed Bearing Hinge
1200-019 2000 Lb. (907 Kg) weight capacity ................ 152.00
1200-039 3000 Lb. (1360 Kg) weight capacity .............. 180.00
•

Designed for use with round or square gate frame.

•

Includes mounting bracket and hardware.

•

Two required (top, bottom) per gate.

Page 28

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

Swing Gate Operator Parts & Accessories

Circuit Boards

Miscellaneous Parts & Accessories

Base Plate, Mounting Pipes, Pivot Arm

4100-018 ...................................................................... 542.00

2600-664 Concrete Base Plate ..................................... 180.00

Used in model 6524

Use to mount the 6050 or 6100 post mount operators onto
an existing concrete pad

4302-018 ...................................................................... 602.00
Used in models 6005, 6003, 6004 and 6400
4405-018 ...................................................................... 638.00
Used in model 6500, 6550
4502-018 ...................................................................... 638.00
Used in models 6050, 6100 and 6300

6500-490 Uphill Arm Pivot Assembly ........................... 240.00
Use with 6050, 6100, 6300 and 6500 operators when the gate
opens on an uphill or downhill slope. Should be used with
1203-084 Torsion Rod Assembly.
6550-490 Uphill Arm Pivot Assembly ........................... 240.00
Use with 6550 operator when the gate opens on an uphill or
downhill slope. Should be used with 1203-084 Torsion Rod
Assembly.

Bi-Parting Connection Cable
2600-754 Primary / Secondary Cable ......................... 2890.00
500-ft (152.4 m) roll

Batteries
1801-009 Battery ........................................................... 91.52
12 Volt, 3.5 Amp Hour
1801-004 Battery ......................................................... 218.00
12 Volt, 18 Amp Hour
1801-005 Battery ......................................................... 278.00
12 Volt, 35 Amp Hour

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 29

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/16/19

9000 Slide Gate Operators

Adjustable Limit Slide Gate Operator

9000
•

Adjustable Limits

•

30:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Steel frame

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

Polyurethane cover

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

20-Feet (6 m) #40 Chain

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

•

Gate tracker data output

19.00
482.60 mm

28.00
711.20 mm

16.75

9.00

425.45 mm

Model

9000
9000

Maximum
Gate Weight

228.60 mm

Maximum
Gate Length

Mount

35 Ft

Pad or
Post4

35 Ft

Pad or
Post3

1000 Lbs
453 KG

1500 Lbs
680 KG

10.7 m
10.7 m

16.75

19.00

425.45 mm

482.60 mm

Class of
Operation1

Voltage2

HP

Power
Outlets

Maximum
Cycles / Day

Loop
Ports2

Adjustable
Clutch

I, II

115 208 230
460 575 VAC

1/2

2

Continuous

2

No

I, II, III, IV

115 208 230
460 575 VAC

1

2

Continuous

2

No

1.

I = Residential; II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access.

2.

High voltage kit (P/N 2600-266) required for 208 Volt and higher.

3.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

3.

Requires post mounting kit.

Page 30

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

9000 Slide Gate Operators

Adjustable Limit Slide Gate Operator

Choose an Operator

Backup Power Inverters

9000-380 ½ HP Primary 115 VAC ............................... 3420.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

9000-381 ½ HP Secondary 115 VAC ........................... 2818.00

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit ................................ 270.00

9000-385 1 HP Primary 115 VAC ................................ 4264.00
9000-386 1 HP Secondary 115 VAC ............................ 3540.00

Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

High Voltage

Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Interconnection Cable

2600-266 High Voltage Kit ........................................... 640.00

2600-755 30-Ft. (9.1 m)................................................ 218.00

Allows the operator to be powered from 208, 230, 460 or 575 VAC
source voltage.

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.
Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Loops and Loop Detectors
See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

2600-756 40-Ft. (12.2 m).............................................. 288.00
2600-757 50-Ft. (15.2 m).............................................. 364.00
2600-754 500-Ft. (152.4 m)........................................ 2890.00
Guarded Guide Rollers & Bracket Assembly
1204-120 Single 3-in (76.2 mm) ..................................... 78.26
1204-122 Dual 3-in (76.2 mm)...................................... 138.00
1204-121 Single 6-in (152.4 mm) ................................... 96.30
1204-123 Dual 6-in (152.4 mm).................................... 170.00
1204-005 Replacement Roller 3-in (76.2 mm)................ 18.06
See page 37 for more information.

Surge Suppression

V-Wheels - Max Gate Weight

1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00

1201-102 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 500 lb. (227 kg)........ 79.46
1201-105 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 750 lb. (340 kg)...... 108.00

Accessories
9000-015 Post Mount Kit1 ............................................ 662.00
2600-961 Chain Link Fence Gate Bracket ....................... 81.88
1601-154 Heater Kit 120 VAC2 ..................................... 484.00
1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC2 ............................ 1012.00
1601-198 Heater Kit 480 VAC2 ................................... 1012.00
1. Includes base plate, mounting posts and hardware.
2. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Chain
2600-442 #40 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m).................................. 156.00

1201-117 Steel 4-in (101.6 mm) 1500 lb. (680 kg) ....... 144.00
See page 36 for more information.

V-Wheels Tandem – Max Gate Weight
1201-012 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 1500 lb. (680 kg).... 204.00
1201-010 Steel 4-in (101.6 mm) 3000 lb. (1360 kg) ..... 364.00
1201-210 Steel 6-in (152.4 mm) 5000 lb. (2268 kg) ..... 532.00
See page 36 for more information.

Chain Idler Assembly
2600-818 ...................................................................... 102.34
Use with rear-mounted operators.

End Catch
1204-004 ........................................................................ 60.18
Designed for gates with 2-inch (50.8 mm) frame.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 31

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9024 DC Slide Gate Operator

Adjustable Limit Slide Gate Operator

9024
•

Input 115/230 VAC or 24 VDC (Solar)

•

30:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Adjustable Limits

•

Built-in Battery Backup

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Galvanized steel frame

•

Gate Tracker Data Output

•

Opens gate 90° in approximately 16 sec.

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

Magnetic lock output

•

20-Feet (6 m) #40 Chain

•

Overlap feature for bi-parting gates

19.00
482.60 mm

28.00
711.20 mm

16.75

9.00

425.45 mm

Model

9024
90246

Maximum
Gate Weight

228.60 mm

Maximum
Gate Length

Mount

40 Ft

Pad or
Post5

40 Ft

Pad or
Post5

1000 Lbs
453 KG

1000 Lbs
453 KG

12.2 m
12.2 m

16.75

19.00

425.45 mm

482.60 mm

Class of
Operation1

Voltage

HP

Power
Outlets

Maximum
Cycles / Day

Loop
Ports2

Adjustable
Clutch

I, II, III, IV

115/230
VAC

1/2

2

Continuous3,4

2

No

I, II, III, IV

24 VDC
(Solar)

1/2

0

Up to 1504

2

No

1.

I = Residential; II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

3.

Continuous operation is when AC power is present. Operation on battery backup (7.5 Ah batteries) is limited to approximately 40 cycles.

4.

Up to 150 cycles with 18 Ah batteries. Actual number of cycles will vary depending on usage, accessories connected, gate weight, operating
condition of gate, temperature and charge state of the batteries. Charge state of batteries is affected by geographical location of the product
when using solar to recharge the batteries.

5.

Requires post mounting kit.

6.

Solar powered operators will not support bi-parting (dual) gate operation.

Page 32

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

9024 DC Slide Gate Operator

Adjustable Limit Slide Gate Operator

Choose an Operator

Backup Power Inverters

9024-380 115/230 VAC .............................................. 3066.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

Includes two 7.5 Ah batteries for limited backup operation. Order 18
Ah batteries to extend the backup operation cycles.

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit ................................ 270.00

Includes 50 feet (15 m) of RS 485 interconnection cable for bi-parting
(dual) gate operation.

Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

9024-381 24 VDC (Solar) ............................................ 2856.00

Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Interconnection Cable RS 485

24 VDC solar input power only (supply your own batteries and solar
charging system or use DKS solar kit).
Solar powered operators will not support bi-parting (dual) gate
operation.

9024-136 50-Ft. (15 m)................................................... 42.00
9024-137 984-Ft. (300 m)............................................. 662.00
Guarded Guide Rollers & Bracket Assembly

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.
Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

1204-120 Single 3-in (76.2 mm) ..................................... 78.26
1204-122 Dual 3-in (76.2 mm)...................................... 138.00
1204-121 Single 6-in (152.4 mm) ................................... 96.30
1204-123 Dual 6-in (152.4 mm).................................... 170.00
1204-005 Replacement Roller 3-in (76.2 mm)................ 18.06
See page 37 for more information.

Battery / Solar Options
1801-004 12-Volt, 18 Ah Battery1 ................................ 218.00
2000-077 24-Volt, 10 Watt Solar Panel ........................ 364.00
2000-070 Solar Kit2....................................................... 850.00
1. Two required for 24 Volt operation.
2. Kit includes two (2) 18 Ah batteries, 10 Watt solar panel and
bracket.

V-Wheels - Max Gate Weight
1201-102 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 500 lb. (227 kg)........ 79.46
1201-105 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 750 lb. (340 kg)...... 108.00
1201-117 Steel 4-in (101.6 mm) 1500 lb. (680 kg) ....... 144.00
See page 36 for more information.

V-Wheels Tandem – Max Gate Weight

Loops and Loop Detectors
See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

1201-012 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 1500 lb. (680 kg).... 204.00
1201-010 Steel 4-in (101.6 mm) 3000 lb. (1360 kg) ..... 364.00
1201-210 Steel 6-in (152.4 mm) 5000 lb. (2268 kg) ..... 532.00

Surge Suppression

See page 36 for more information.

1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00
Chain Idler Assembly
Accessories

2600-818 ...................................................................... 102.34

9000-015 Post Mount Kit1 ............................................ 662.00

Use with rear-mounted operators.

2600-961 Chain Link Fence Gate Bracket ....................... 81.88
1601-154 Heater Kit 120 VAC2 ..................................... 484.00
1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230

VAC2 ............................ 1012.00

1. Includes base plate, mounting posts and hardware.

End Catch
1204-004 ........................................................................ 60.18
Designed for gates with 2-inch (50.8 mm) frame.

2. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Chain
2600-442 #40 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 156.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 33

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9050 / 9100 Slide Gate Operators

Automatic Magnetic Limits

9050 / 9100

9100

•

Self-Adjusting Magnetic Limits

•

G90 Galvanized steel frame

•

Built-in clutch

•

Steel cover

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

20-Feet (6 m) #40 Chain

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

Gate tracker data output (9100 only)

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function (9100 only)

•

Fail-Safe Configuration

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature (9100 only)

Top

Front

Right Side

11.50
292.10 mm

24.00
12.00

622.30 mm

304.80 mm

3.25
82.55 mm

14.75
374.65 mm

7.00
177.80 mm

Model

9050
9100

Maximum
Gate Weight
500 Lbs
227 KG

1000 Lbs
453 KG

Maximum
Gate Length

Mount

16 Ft
30 Ft

4.88 m
9.14 m

12.00

11.50

304.80 mm

292.10 mm

Class of
Operation1

Voltage

HP

Power
Outlets

Maximum
Cycles / Day

Loop
Ports2

Adjustable
Clutch3

Pad or
Post4

I

115 VAC

1/25

2

100

2

Yes

Pad or
Post4

I, II, III, IV

115 VAC

1/2

2

Continuous

2

Yes

1.

I = Residential; II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

3.

Clutch is not applicable as an entrapment protection device.

4.

Requires post mount steel base plate.

5.

This is an intermittent duty cycle motor.

Page 34

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

9050 / 9100 Slide Gate Operators

Automatic Magnetic Limits

Choose an Operator

Backup Power Inverters

9050-380 ½ HP ........................................................... 1984.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

9100-380 ½ HP ........................................................... 2890.00

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit................................ 270.00

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices

Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.

Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Interconnection Cable
2600-755 30-Ft. (9.1 m)................................................ 218.00

Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

2600-756 40-Ft. (12.2 m).............................................. 288.00

Loops and Loop Detectors

2600-754 500-Ft. (152.4 m)........................................ 2890.00

2600-757 50-Ft. (15.2 m).............................................. 364.00
See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

Surge Suppression
1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00
Accessories
2600-418 Steel Base Plate .............................................. 90.30

Guarded Guide Rollers & Bracket Assembly
1204-120 Single 3-in (76.2 mm) ..................................... 78.26
1204-122 Dual 3-in (76.2 mm) ..................................... 138.00
1204-121 Single 6-in (152.4 mm) ................................... 96.30
1204-123 Dual 6-in (152.4 mm) ................................... 170.00
1204-005 Replacement Roller 3-in (76.2 mm) ............... 18.06
See page 37 for more information.

2600-970 Base Plate Stop Bracket1 ................................ 60.18
2600-862 Fail-Secure Lock Kit2 ....................................... 31.30
2600-961 Chain Link Fence Gate Bracket ....................... 81.88
1601-154 Heater Kit 120 VAC3 ..................................... 484.00
1. Use with 2600-418 base plate.
2. Operators come standard in a Fail-Safe configuration.
3. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Chain
2600-442 #40 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 156.00
2600-271 Chain Stop #40, #41 Chain ............................. 30.12

V-Wheels - Max Gate Weight
1201-102 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 500 lb. (227 kg) ....... 79.46
1201-105 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 750 lb. (340 kg) ..... 108.00
1201-117 Steel 4-in (101.6 mm) 1500 lb. (680 kg) ....... 144.00
See page 36 for more information.

V-Wheels Tandem – Max Gate Weight
1201-012 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 1500 lb. (680 kg) ... 204.00
1201-010 Steel 4-in (101.6 mm) 3000 lb. (1360 kg) ..... 364.00
1201-210 Steel 6-in (152.4 mm) 5000 lb. (2268 kg) ..... 532.00
See page 36 for more information.

Chain Idler Assembly
2600-818 ...................................................................... 102.34
Use with rear-mounted operators.

End Catch
1204-004 ........................................................................ 60.18
Designed for gates with 2-inch (50.8 mm) frame.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 35

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9150 Slide Gate Operators

Automatic Magnetic Limits

9150
•

Self-Adjusting Magnetic Limits

•

G90 Galvanized steel frame

•

Built-in clutch

•

Steel cover

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

20-Feet (6 m) #40 Chain

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

•

Fail-Safe Configuration

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

Top

Front

Right Side

16.75
425.45 mm

24.50
622.30 mm

3.25
82.55 mm

15.25
387.35 mm

7.13
181.10 mm

Model

9150

9150

18.00

18.00

16.75

457.20 mm

457.20 mm

425.45 mm

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Mount

1000 Lbs

30 Ft

Pad or
Post4

45 Ft

Pad or
Post4

454 KG

1500 Lbs
680 KG

9.14 m

13.7 m

Class of
Operation1

Voltage2

HP

Power
Outlets

Maximum
Cycles / Day

Loop
Ports2

Adjustable
Clutch3

I, II, III, IV

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

1/2

2

Continuous

2

Yes

I, II, III, IV

115 208
230 460
575 VAC

1

2

Continuous

2

Yes

1.

I = Residential; II = Commercial; III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access.

2.

High voltage kit (P/N 2600-266) required for 208 Volt and higher.

3.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

4.

Clutch is not applicable as an entrapment protection device.

5.

Requires post mount steel base plate.

Page 36

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

9150 Slide Gate Operators

Automatic Magnetic Limits

Choose an Operator

Backup Power Inverters

9150-384 ½ HP ........................................................... 3094.00

1000-083 1000 Watt, Pure Sine Wave ....................... 2148.00

9150-380 1 HP............................................................ 3732.00

1000-045 Inverter Post Mount Kit................................ 270.00

High Voltage

Includes two (2) 35 AH SLA batteries and can power up to two ½ HP
operators or one (1) 1 HP operator. This version is suitable to be used
with all brands of gate operators. See page 46 for more information.

2600-266 High Voltage Kit ........................................... 640.00
Allows the operator to be powered from 208, 230, 460 or 575 VAC
source voltage.

Bi-Parting (Dual) Gate Interconnection Cable
2600-755 30-Ft. (9.1 m)................................................ 218.00
2600-756 40-Ft. (12.2 m).............................................. 288.00

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices

2600-757 50-Ft. (15.2 m).............................................. 364.00

Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see pages 42-43.

2600-754 500-Ft. (152.4 m)........................................ 2890.00

Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Guarded Guide Rollers & Bracket Assembly

Loops and Loop Detectors
See page 42 for a complete list of all loop detectors, prefabricated
loops and loop accessories available.

1204-120 Single 3-in (76.2 mm) ..................................... 78.26
1204-122 Dual 3-in (76.2 mm) ..................................... 138.00
1204-121 Single 6-in (152.4 mm) ................................... 96.30
1204-123 Dual 6-in (152.4 mm) ................................... 170.00
1204-005 Replacement Roller 3-in (76.2 mm) ............... 18.06

Surge Suppression
1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC) ................................ 156.00
Accessories
2600-495 Steel Base Plate ............................................ 302.00
2600-970 Base Plate Stop Bracket1 ................................ 60.18
2600-865 Fail-Secure Lock Kit2 ....................................... 38.54
2600-961 Chain Link Fence Gate Bracket ....................... 81.88
1601-154 Heater Kit 120 VAC3 ..................................... 484.00
1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC3 ............................ 1012.00
1601-198 Heater Kit 480 VAC3 ................................... 1012.00
1. Use with 2600-495 base plate.
2. Operators come standard in a Fail-Safe configuration.

See page 37 for more information.

V-Wheels - Max Gate Weight
1201-102 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 500 lb. (227 kg) ....... 79.46
1201-105 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 750 lb. (340 kg) ..... 108.00
1201-117 Steel 4-in (101.6 mm) 1500 lb. (680 kg) ....... 144.00
See page 36 for more information.

V-Wheels Tandem – Max Gate Weight
1201-012 UHMW 4-in (101.6 mm) 1500 lb. (680 kg) ... 204.00
1201-010 Steel 4-in (101.6 mm) 3000 lb. (1360 kg) ..... 364.00
1201-210 Steel 6-in (152.4 mm) 5000 lb. (2268 kg) ..... 532.00
See page 36 for more information.

3. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Chain Idler Assembly
Chain

2600-818 ...................................................................... 102.34

2600-442 #40 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m).................................. 156.00

Use with rear-mounted operators.

2600-271 Chain Stop #40, #41 Chain ............................. 30.12

End Catch
1204-004 ........................................................................ 60.18
Designed for gates with 2-inch (50.8 mm) frame.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 37

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Slide Gate Accessories
V-Wheels
5.00

2.25

127 mm

4.00

57 mm

102 mm

2.50

9.00

229 mm

1.75

44 mm

7.00

178 mm

4.00

57 mm

5.25

133 mm

102 mm

13.00

6.00

152 mm

2.50

330 mm

1.75

57 mm

44 mm

7.50

190 mm

6.00

152 mm

V-Wheels

V-Wheel Assembly

Tandem V-Wheel Assembly

4-Inch (102 mm) V-Wheels

6-Inch (152 mm) V-Wheels

1201-004 UHMW w/sleeve bearing................................ 43.34

1201-000 Steel w/sealed bearing ................................ 212.00

•

500 Lb. (226 Kg) maximum weight

•

2500 Lb. (1133 Kg) maximum weight

1201-006 UHMW w/sealed bearing ............................... 60.18
•

750 Lb. (340 Kg) maximum weight

1201-016 Steel w/sealed bearing ................................. 108.00
•

1500 Lb. (680 Kg) maximum weight

6-Inch (152 mm) Tandem V-Wheel Assembly
1201-210 Steel w/sealed bearing ................................ 532.00
•

5000 Lb. (2267 Kg) maximum weight

4-Inch (102 mm) V-Wheel Assemblies1
1201-102 UHMW w/sleeve bearing................................ 79.46
•

500 Lb. (226 Kg) maximum weight

1201-105 UHMW w/sealed bearing ............................. 108.00
•

750 Lb. (340 Kg) maximum weight

1201-117 Steel w/sealed bearing ................................. 144.00
•

1500 Lb. (680 Kg) maximum weight

1. Assemblies include wheel guarding as required by industry safety standards.

4-Inch (102 mm) Tandem V-Wheel Assemblies
1201-012 UHMW w/sealed bearing ............................. 204.00
•

1500 Lb. (680 Kg) maximum weight

1201-010 Steel w/sealed bearing ................................. 364.00
•

3000 Lb. (1360 Kg) maximum weight

Page 38

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

Slide Gate Accessories
Guide Rollers, Chain Idler, End Catch
4.50

8.88

114 mm

3.25

225 mm

4.00

82 mm

102 mm

1204-120

1204-122

4.00

2.00

5.50

51 mm

102 mm

4.50

140 mm

114 mm

2.00

3.25

51 mm

82 mm

7.00

7.00

179 mm

2.75

179 mm

4.50

70 mm

114 mm

1204-121

1204-123

2600-818

1204-004

3-Inch (76 mm) Guide Roller Assemblies1

Chain Idler Assembly

1204-120 Single ............................................................. 78.26

2600-818 ...................................................................... 102.34

1204-122 Dual ............................................................. 138.00

•

1. Assemblies include roller guarding as required by industry safety standards.

Use this with rear-mounted slide gate operators. Works
with #40 and #41 chain.

6-Inch (152 mm) Guide Roller Assemblies1

End Catch

1204-121 Single ............................................................. 96.30

1204-004 ........................................................................ 60.18

1204-123 Dual ............................................................. 170.00

•

Use with 2-inch (51 mm) gate frame.

1. Assemblies include roller guarding as required by industry safety standards.

3-Inch (76 mm) Replacement Roller
1204-005........................................................................ 18.06

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 39

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Slide Gate Operator Parts & Accessories

Miscellaneous Parts & Accessories

Circuit Boards

Chain

4100-018 ...................................................................... 516.00

2600-441 #41 Chain – 20 Ft (6 m) .................................122.00

Used in model 9024

2600-442 #40 Chain – 20 Ft (6 m) .................................156.00

4405-018 ...................................................................... 608.00

2600-443 #41 Chain Nickel Plated – 10 Ft (3 m) ...........106.00

Used in model 9000

2600-444 #40 Chain Nickel Plated – 10 Ft (3 m) ...........142.00

4602-018 ...................................................................... 744.00

2600-271 Chain Stop for #40 and #41 Chain...................30.12

Used in models 9100, 9150

2600-961 Chain Link Fence Gate Bracket........................81.88

4702-018 ...................................................................... 516.00
Used in models 9050

Base Plates
2600-418 Steel Base Plate ..............................................90.30
Use with 9050 and 9100 operators
2600-495 Steel Base Plate ............................................302.00
Use with 9150 operator
2600-970 Base Plate Stop Bracket ..................................60.18
Use with 2600-418 and 2600-495

Bi-Parting Connection Cable
2600-754 Primary / Secondary Cable .........................2890.00
500-ft (152.4 m) roll
9024-137 RS 485 Cable .................................................662.00
984-ft (300 m) roll

Page 40

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Blank Page

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 41

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Entrapment Prevention Devices
Non-contact Sensors Type B1

8080-050

8080-051

8080-052

8080-053

8080-054

8080-055

8080-056

Thru-Beam Devices

Photo-Reflective Devices

8080-050 (ME-PG) ........................................................ 546.00

8080-051 (ME-RG) ....................................................... 502.00

•

100 Ft. (30 m) maximum sensing distance.

•

30 Ft. (9 m) maximum sensing distance.

•

Receiver (RX-R) 7-30 VAC / 10-42 VDC.

•

Receiver 7-30 VAC / 10-42 VDC.

•

Transmitter (EM-W) 7-30 VAC / 10-42 VDC.

8080-052 (EMX MON) .................................................. 546.00

8080-053 (EMX IRB-RET) .............................................. 502.00

•

115 Ft. (35 m) maximum sensing distance.

•

60 Ft. (18 m) maximum sensing distance.

•

12-24 VAC / 6-35 VDC.

•

12-24 VAC / 6-35 VDC.

•

Includes hood.

8080-054 (Seco-Larm E960-D90GQ) ............................. 546.00

8080-055 (Seco-Larm E936-S45RRGQ)......................... 502.00

•

90 Ft. (27 m) maximum sensing distance.

•

45 Ft. (14 m) maximum sensing distance.

•

12-30 VAC / VDC.

•

12-30 VAC / VDC.

8080-056 (Omron E3K) ................................................ 502.00

Page 42

•

33 Ft. (10 m) maximum sensing distance.

•

24-240 VAC / VDC.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Page Rev 1/2/19

Entrapment Prevention Devices

O UT A

O UT B

P OWE R

RBANDTX

RBANDRX

Contact Sensors Type B2

I N3

I N1

I N4

I N2

I N5

I N6

8080-070
8080-090

8080-071
8080-091

8080-065
8080-085

8080-066
8080-086

8080-008

8080-006

8080-079

2-Wire Contact Edge with 10K Termination

Contact Sensor Accessories

8080-071 6 Ft. (1.8 m) ME111-T2 ................................ 384.00

8080-079 Multiple Input Module (MIM 62) ................. 870.00

•

Ideal for barrier arms, includes mounting channel.

•

Monitors up to six (6) external contact edges.

8080-070 5 Ft. (1.5 m) ME123-T2 ................................ 384.00
•

Includes mounting channel.

8080-065 5 Ft. (1.5 m) MGR20-T2................................ 422.00
•

Fits on 2 in (51 mm) round post.

8080-066 5 Ft. (1.5 m) MGS20-T2 ................................ 422.00
•

Fits on 2 in (51 mm) square post.

4-Wire Contact Edge1

8080-008 Wireless Monitored Link (RB-G-K10)1 .......... 526.00
•

Receiver: 12-24 VAC / VDC.

•

Transmitter: 3.6 VDC / 2 AA Lithium.

•

Receiver can monitor up to six (6) edges.

1. Kit includes receiver and one (1) RB-TX-10 transmitter.

8080-006 Monitored Transmitter (RB-TX-10) .............. 262.00

8080-091 6 Ft. (1.8 m) ME111 ..................................... 384.00
•

Ideal for barrier arms, includes mounting channel.

8080-090 5 Ft. (1.5 m) ME123 ..................................... 384.00
•

Includes mounting channel.

8080-085 5 Ft. (1.5 m) MGR20..................................... 422.00
•

Fits on 2 in (51 mm) round post.

8080-086 5 Ft. (1.5 m) MGS20 ..................................... 422.00
•

Fits on 2 in (51 mm) square post.

1. 4-wire edges do not have 10K termination and are designed to be used wired
in series with the 2-wire T2 edges.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 43

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Vehicle Protection
Loop Detectors and Loops

9411-010

9402-045 / 9402-047

9410-010 / 9416-010

9409-010 / 9415-010

9402-050

9402-044

DKS Plug-In Loop Detectors

Loop Wire – 18 AWG – XLPE Insulation

9411-010 Single Channel + Aux Relay ........................... 250.00

9402-076 500 Ft. (152 m) Black.................................... 194.00

9410-010 Single Channel .............................................. 232.00

9402-077 1000 Ft. (304 m) Black.................................. 302.00

9409-010 Two Channel ................................................. 436.00

9402-078 500 Ft. (152 m) Blue ..................................... 194.00

9415-010 Two Channel Low Power Draw ..................... 458.00

9402-079 1000 Ft. (304 m) Blue ................................... 302.00

9416-010 Single Channel Low Power Draw .................. 262.00

9402-080 500 Ft. (152 m) Red ...................................... 194.00
9402-081 1000 Ft. (304 m) Red .................................... 302.00

Reno A&E Wired Loop Detectors1, 2
9402-045 24 VAC / 12-24 VDC ...................................... 302.00

Prefabricated Loops1

9402-047 120 VAC ........................................................ 302.00

9401-060 Blue Wire ..................................................... 302.00

9402-061 Wire Harness .................................................. 26.50

9401-061 Yellow Wire .................................................. 302.00
9401-062 Red Wire ...................................................... 302.00

Carlo Gavazzi Wired Loop Detectors1, 2

24 Ft. (7 m) circumference, 50 Ft. (15 M) lead-in wire.

9402-044 24 VAC / VDC ................................................ 222.00
9402-061 Wire Harness .................................................. 26.50

Loop Accessories
9401-045 Meg-Ohm Test Meter .................................. 542.00

Diablo Wired Loop Detectors
9402-050 10-30 VAC / VDC Low Power Draw ............... 302.00
1. Detectors have two (2) relay outputs.
2. 9402-061 harness required.

Page 44

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control

Control Stations
Manual Control

3-Button Control1
1200-007 Indoor use only ............................................... 90.30
•

Mounts into single-gang electrical box.

1200-006 Indoor or Outdoor use .................................. 164.00
•

Wall mount

1. These control stations use a normally open stop circuit and can only be used
with the following models: 6050, 6100, 9100, 9150.

Toggle Control
1200-017 Indoor use only ............................................... 54.18
•

Mounts into single-gang electrical box

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 45

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Vehicular Traffic Control
Page Rev 1/2/19

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Model 1000
Back-up Power / Inverter

13.00

8.00

330 mm

203 mm

33.00
838 mm

21.00
533 mm

1000-083

Model 1000 Power Inverter
1000-083 Pure Sine Wave, 1000 Watt ........................ 2148.00

1000-045

Accessories
1000-045 Post Mount Kit ............................................. 270.00

•

Includes two (2) batteries.

1801-005 12-Volt, 35 Ah SLA Battery ........................... 278.00

•

Will power two (2) ½ HP operators or a single 1 HP
operator.

1000-044 Battery Cable Set ........................................... 51.32

•

Suitable for use with all DoorKing gate operators and
most other brands.

Page 46

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Section A2
This Price Schedule is effective January 7, 2019.

Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems
Date

Page

1-2-19

All

Comment
January, 2019 Price Schedule update.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 1

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019

Entry System Connection Options – Your Choice
For more information, please visit:
http://www.doorking.com/connect and http://www.doorking.com/imserver and http://www.doorking.com/cellular

4G-LTE Cellular Service (Plug & Play)
• Voice and Programming (wireless via the cellular network)
• DKS Cellular (subscription based service)
Internet (VoIP) Connection (Plug & Play)
• Voice and Programming (wired connection)
• DKS Internet or VoIP subscription service required
• Requires 1830-186 Network Adapter for programming1
• Requires 1815-530 VoIP adapter for DKS VoIP1 or use third party VoIP adapter2
• Plug & Play for LAN and WAN connections 2334-0803

1: Subscription service.
2: DoorKing does not guarantee third party VoIP service. Third party VoIP subscription may be required.
3: Combines 1830-186, 1815-530 and Ethernet switch into a single enclosure.

Internet (VoIP) Connection (Manual IP Configuration)
• Voice and Programming (wired connection)
• Manual setup – requires 1830-185 Network adapter
• Manual setup required: determine Default Gateway, set your IP address, setup Port Forwarding,
configure Firewall for access, order Static IP address from internet provider or setup DDNS host
account
• Compatible with most VoIP providers1
1: DoorKing does not guarantee third party VoIP service. Third party VoIP subscription may be required.

Land Line Telephone Service3 (POTS line, Cable or Fiber1)
• Voice and Programming (wired connection)
• Programming options:
o IM Server Modem (subscription based service)
o Modem to Modem2

1: Not applicable if Cable or Fiber is a cloud based telephone service.
2: Not compatible with all modems. Requires phone line and modem at programming PC.
3: DoorKing does not recommend using POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) as a connection option and does not guarantee
modem connections as many phone company services and switches no longer support modem communications.

TTY Connection Options
• Allows hearing impaired persons to connect their TTY device to the telephone entry system.
• P/N 1830-310 is factory installed at time of order.
• P/N 1830-315 is an add-on device that can be added to the telephone entry system at any time.

Page 2

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Table of Contents
Telephone Entry & Access Control
Model 1802 ............................................................................................................................................................ 4
Model 1803 ............................................................................................................................................................ 6
Model 1808 ............................................................................................................................................................ 8
Model 1810 .......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Model 1812 .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
Model 1819 .......................................................................................................................................................... 14
Model 1816/1820 ................................................................................................................................................. 16
Model 1833 80 Series ........................................................................................................................................... 18
Model 1834 90 Series ........................................................................................................................................... 20
Model 1834 80 Series ........................................................................................................................................... 22
Model 1835 90 Series ........................................................................................................................................... 24
Model 1835 80 Series ........................................................................................................................................... 26
Model 1837 90 Series ........................................................................................................................................... 28
Model 1837 80 Series ........................................................................................................................................... 30
Model 1838 .......................................................................................................................................................... 32
Model 1838 Access Plus ....................................................................................................................................... 34

Accessories
Connection Options .............................................................................................................................................. 36
Elevator Control.................................................................................................................................................... 37
Tracker Expansion Boards .................................................................................................................................... 38
Wireless Kits for Tracker Expansion Boards ......................................................................................................... 39
Telephone Entry Systems Mounting Kits .............................................................................................................. 40
Light Kits ............................................................................................................................................................... 41
Add-on Directories ............................................................................................................................................... 42
Utility Enclosures .................................................................................................................................................. 43
Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................... 44
Replacement Components ................................................................................................................................... 45

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 3

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1802 Telephone Entry System

Residential, Commercial

1802 / 1802 EPD

1802 AP (Access Plus) ONLY

•

Hands free full duplex voice communication

•

Control up to 8 entry points

•

Programmable Directory Codes (1-4 digits)

•

IP Addressable

•

16-digit dialing

•

PC Programmable

•

Includes 16 VAC power transformer

•

2-Digit directory codes

•

Backlit keypad and A-Z-CALL buttons (EPD only)

•

20-digit dialing

•

Includes 16 VAC power transformer

6.50

5.00

6.50

8.38

3.25

8.38

165.10 mm

127.00 mm

165.10 mm

212.85 mm

82.55 mm

212.85 mm

12.00
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

304.80 mm
A
Z
Call

Surface Mount
1802 / 1802 AP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

14.00

12.00

355.60 mm

304.80 mm
A
Z
Call

Surface Mount
1802 EPD

Flush Mount
1802

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

Flush Mount
1802 EPD

Model

Phone
Numbers

Directory6
Names

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Temporary
Codes

Holiday
Schedules

1802

600

N/A

1000

0

2

1

No

No

5

No

1802EPD

100

100

100

0

2

1

No

No

5

No

1802AP

27

N/A

50

100

2

2

6 Max

Yes

10

Yes

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit RS-485 device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal Identification
Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

3.

1802 and 1802EPD, auxiliary input allows a switch closure to activate relay 2, or can be set to auto-dial a preprogrammed telephone number.
1802 AP uses a standard RS-485 data input.

4.

Six (6) additional entry points can be controlled via RS-485 card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads.

5.

AP Programming software available for free download at doorking.com.

6.

Single line 16 character 5/16 LCD display.

Page 4

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1802 Telephone Entry System

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Residential, Commercial

1802 Telephone Entry Systems

1802 AP (ACCESS PLUS ONLY) Expansion Options

1802-082 Surface Mount ........................................... 1230.00

2354-010 Conversion Board ......................................... 180.00

1802-089 Flush Mount ............................................... 1542.00

1815-235 Conversion Board w/Enclosure .................... 316.00

1802-090 Surface Mount EPD .................................... 1506.00

Converts 26-bit Wiegand to RS-485. Requires 12-16 VDC power.

1802-091 Flush Mount EPD........................................ 1818.00
1802-092 Surface Mount AP (Access Plus) ................. 1926.00

1812-020 12-VDC, 1A Transformer ................................ 51.62
1200-080 Transformer Box........................................... 234.00

Service Connection Options
1800-081 Cellular Voice + Data1,2 ................................. 654.00
1801-080 Cellular Voice Only1,3 ................................... 434.00
1 - Cellular service plan required (provided by DoorKing).
2 - Use with 1802 AP model.
3 - Use with 1802 and 1802 EPD models.

1802 Lobby Panel
1802-083 ...................................................................... 916.00
1802-094 .................................................................... 1226.00
Lobby panels can only be used with the 1816 or 1820 telephone
intercom system. They cannot be connected directly to telephone
service.

Accessories
1701-080 20-Name Directory....................................... 156.00
1702-080 60-Name Directory....................................... 228.00
1710-080 200-Name Directory Surface Mount ............ 484.00
1710-081 200-Name Directory Flush Mount................ 484.00

1816-083 Intercom Phone Expansion......................... 1144.00
The 1816-083 expands the “No Phone Line” telephone intercom
interface on Access Plus systems from a single phone line up to 11
phone lines. The system can be further expanded to interface with up
to a maximum of 23 phone lines.

RS-485 Card Readers (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1815-332 DK Prox Reader ............................................ 432.00
1815-232 ID Tech Reader ............................................. 504.00
1815-233 AWID Reader ................................................ 516.00
1815-234 HID Reader ................................................... 916.00
RS-485 Keypads (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1513-081 Surface Mount.............................................. 542.00
1513-082 Flush Mount ................................................. 674.00
RS-485 RF Controls (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
8053-080 MicroPlus Receiver ....................................... 218.00

1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount ................... 576.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-588 Heater Kit (1802, 1802 AP) .............................. 238.00
2600-582 LCD Heater (1802 EPD) ..................................... 52.98
1812-145 CCTV Color Camera .................................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1802-111 Post Mount Adapter Plate1 .......................... 166.00
1. Required if mounting 1802 to gooseneck post.

1830-310 TTY Add-on Factory Installed ....................... 312.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on Kit ............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 5

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1803 Telephone Entry System

Residential, Commercial

1803
•

Hands free full duplex voice communication

•

Stainless steel faceplate

•

Programmable Directory Codes (1-4 digits)

•

Galvanized steel sub-plate

•

16-digit dialing

•

Metal keypads and buttons

•

Includes 16 VAC power transformer

•

Postal lock provision

11.25

4.50

12.00

3.25

285.75 mm

114.30 mm

304.80 mm

82.55 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

13.00
330.20 mm

Surface Mount

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

13.25
336.55 mm

Flush Mount

Model

Phone
Numbers

Directory
Names

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Temporary
Codes

Holiday
Schedules

1803

600

N/A

1000

0

2

1

No

No

5

No

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes are not used with the 1803.

3.

1803 auxiliary input allows a switch closure to activate relay 2, or can be set to auto-dial a preprogrammed telephone number.

Page 6

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1803 Telephone Entry System

Residential, Commercial

1803 Telephone Entry Systems

Mounting Accessories

1803-080 Surface Mount ........................................... 1614.00

1803-150 Surface Mount Trim Ring Black .................... 236.00

1803-084 Flush Mount ............................................... 1614.00

1814-165 Flush Mount Kit Stainless Steel .................... 396.00

1803 Lobby Panels

Accessories

1803-090 Surface Mount ........................................... 1072.00

1701-080 20-Name Directory ....................................... 156.00

1803-092 Flush Mount ............................................... 1072.00

1702-080 60-Name Directory ....................................... 228.00

Lobby panels can only be used with the 1816 or 1820 telephone
intercom system. They cannot be connected directly to telephone
service.

1710-081 Large Directory Flush Mount ........................ 484.00

Service Connection Options
1801-080 Cellular Voice Only1 ..................................... 434.00
1 - Cellular service plan required (provided by DoorKing)

1710-080 Large Directory Surface Mount .................... 484.00

1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount ................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount .................... 576.00
1720-080 LED Light Kit ................................................. 444.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00
1812-145 CCTV Color Camera .................................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1830-310 TTY Add-on Factory Installed........................ 312.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on Kit.............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 7

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1808 Telephone Entry System

Residential, Commercial

1808

1808 AP (Access Plus) ONLY

•

Hands free full duplex voice communication

•

Control up to 8 entry points

•

Programmable Directory Codes (1-4 digits)

•

IP Addressable

•

16-digit dialing

•

PC Programmable

•

Includes 16 VAC power transformer

•

2-Digit directory codes

•

20-digit dialing

•

Includes 16 VAC power transformer

11.00

6.50

279.40 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

165.10 mm

7.50

Push Button
To Call

190.50 mm

Surface Mount
1808

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

11.00

6.50

279.40 mm

165.10 mm

7.50
190.50 mm

Surface Mount w/Directory
1808 / 1808 AP

Model

Phone
Numbers

Directory
Names

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

1808

600

N/A

1808AP

27

N/A

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Temporary
Codes

Holiday
Schedules

1000

0

2

1

No

No

5

No

50

100

2

2

6 Max

Yes

10

Yes

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit RS-485 device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal Identification
Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

3.

1808 auxiliary input allows a switch closure to activate relay 2, or can be set to auto-dial a preprogrammed telephone number. 1808 AP uses a
standard RS-485 data input.

4.

Six (6) additional entry points can be controlled via RS-485 card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads.

5.

AP Programming software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 8

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1808 Telephone Entry System

Residential, Commercial

1808 Telephone Entry Systems

1808 AP (ACCESS PLUS ONLY) Expansion Options

1808-082 Surface Mount w/Directory ....................... 1614.00

2354-010 Conversion Board ......................................... 180.00

1808-084 Surface Mount ........................................... 1506.00

1815-235 Conversion Board w/Enclosure .................... 316.00

1808-085 Surface Mount AP (Access Plus) ................. 1926.00

Converts 26-bit Wiegand to RS-485. Requires 12-16 VDC power.

1812-020 12-VDC, 1A Transformer ................................ 51.62

1808 Lobby Panels
1808-081 Surface Mount ........................................... 1048.00
1808-083 Surface Mount w/Directory ....................... 1144.00
Lobby panels can only be used with the 1816 or 1820 telephone
intercom system. They cannot be connected directly to telephone
service.

Service Connection Options
1800-081 Cellular Voice + Data1,2 ................................. 654.00
1801-080 Cellular Voice

Only1,3

................................... 434.00

1 - Cellular service plan required (provided by DoorKing).
2 - Use with 1808 AP model.
3 - Use with 1808 model.

Accessories
1701-080 20-Name Directory....................................... 156.00
1702-080 60-Name Directory....................................... 228.00
1710-080 200-Name Directory Surface Mount ............ 484.00
1710-081 200-Name Directory Flush Mount................ 484.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00

1200-080 Transformer Box........................................... 234.00
1816-083 Intercom Phone Expansion......................... 1144.00
The 1816-083 expands the “No Phone Line” telephone intercom
interface on Access Plus systems from a single phone line up to 11
phone lines. The system can be further expanded to interface with up
to a maximum of 23 phone lines.

RS-485 Card Readers (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1815-332 DK Prox Reader ............................................ 432.00
1815-232 ID Tech Reader ............................................. 504.00
1815-233 AWID Reader ................................................ 516.00
1815-234 HID Reader ................................................... 916.00
RS-485 Keypads (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1513-081 Surface Mount.............................................. 542.00
1513-082 Flush Mount ................................................. 674.00
RS-485 RF Controls (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
8053-080 MicroPlus Receiver ....................................... 218.00

1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount ................... 576.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-588 Heater Kit (1802, 1802 AP) .............................. 238.00
1812-145 CCTV Color Camera .................................... 1022.00
1830-310 TTY Add-on Factory Installed ....................... 312.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on Kit ............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 9

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1810 Telephone Entry System

Residential, Commercial

1810

1810 AP (Access Plus) ONLY

•

Hands free full duplex voice communication

•

Control up to 8 entry points

•

Programmable Directory Codes (1-4 digits)

•

IP Addressable

•

16-digit dialing

•

PC Programmable

•

Includes 16 VAC power transformer

•

2-Digit directory codes

•

20-digit dialing

•

Includes 16 VAC power transformer

11.25

4.75

12.00

3.25

285.75 mm

120.65 mm

304.80 mm

82.55 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

13.00

13.25

330.20 mm

336.55 mm

Surface Mount
1810 / 1810 AP

Flush Mount
1810 / 1810 AP

Model

Phone
Numbers

Directory
Names

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

1810

600

N/A

1810AP

27

N/A

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Temporary
Codes

Holiday
Schedules

1000

0

2

1

No

No

5

No

50

100

2

2

6 Max

Yes

10

Yes

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit RS-485 device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal Identification
Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

3.

1810 auxiliary input allows a switch closure to activate relay 2, or can be set to auto-dial a preprogrammed telephone number. 1810 AP uses a
standard RS-485 data input.

4.

Six (6) additional entry points can be controlled via RS-485 card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads.

5.

AP Programming software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 10

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1810 Telephone Entry System

Residential, Commercial

1810 Telephone Entry Systems

1810 AP (ACCESS PLUS ONLY) Expansion Options

1810-080 Surface Mount ........................................... 1566.00

2354-010 Conversion Board ......................................... 180.00

1810-084 Flush Mount ............................................... 1566.00

1815-235 Conversion Board w/Enclosure .................... 316.00

1810-095 Surface Mount AP (Access Plus) ................. 2050.00

Converts 26-bit Wiegand to RS-485. Requires 12-16 VDC power.

1810-096 Flush Mount AP (Access Plus) .................... 2050.00
1812-020 12-VDC, 1A Transformer ................................ 51.62
1200-080 Transformer Box........................................... 234.00

1810 Lobby Panels
1810-088 Surface Mount ........................................... 1216.00
1810-090 Flush Mount ............................................... 1206.00
Lobby panels can only be used with the 1816 or 1820 telephone
intercom system. They cannot be connected directly to telephone
service.

Service Connection Options

1816-083 Intercom Phone Expansion......................... 1144.00
The 1816-083 expands the “No Phone Line” telephone intercom
interface on Access Plus systems from a single phone line up to 11
phone lines. The system can be further expanded to interface with up
to a maximum of 23 phone lines.

RS-485 Card Readers (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)

1800-081 Cellular Voice + Data ................................. 654.00
1,2

1801-080 Cellular Voice Only1,3 ................................... 434.00
1 - Cellular service plan required (provided by DoorKing).
2 - Use with 1810 AP model.
3 - Use with 1810 model.

Accessories
1803-150 Surface Mount Trim Ring Black .................... 236.00
1814-165 Flush Mount Kit Stainless Steel .................... 396.00
1814-152 Surface Mount Ring for Flush Units ............. 236.00
1701-080 20-Name Directory....................................... 156.00

1815-332 DK Prox Reader ............................................ 432.00
1815-232 ID Tech Reader ............................................. 504.00
1815-233 AWID Reader ................................................ 516.00
1815-234 HID Reader ................................................... 916.00
RS-485 Keypads (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1513-081 Surface Mount.............................................. 542.00
1513-082 Flush Mount ................................................. 674.00
RS-485 RF Controls (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
8053-080 MicroPlus Receiver ....................................... 218.00

1702-080 60-Name Directory....................................... 228.00
1710-080 200-Name Directory Surface Mount ............ 484.00
1710-081 200-Name Directory Flush Mount................ 484.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount ................... 576.00
1720-080 LED Light Kit ................................................. 444.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00
1812-145 CCTV Color Camera .................................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1830-310 TTY Add-on Factory Installed ....................... 312.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on Kit ............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 11

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1812 Telephone Entry System

Residential

1812 (Classic)

1812 P (Plus) and 1812 AP (Access Plus)

•

2-Digit directory codes

•

2-Digit directory codes

•

11-digit dialing

•

20-digit dialing

•

Includes 24 VAC power transformer

•

Includes 16 VAC power transformer

•

Call Forward Time Zones

•

Call Forward Time Zones

•

Do Not Disturb

•

Do Not Disturb Feature

•

Analog Voice Circuit

•

HD Digital Voice Circuit

10.88
276.35 MM

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

6.00

10.00

5.25

11.88

4.50

10.75

3.50

152.4 MM

254.0 MM

133.35 MM

301.75 MM

114.3 MM

273.05 mm

88.9 mm

7.38
187.5 MM

Surface Mount Curved
1812 P / 1812 AP

Model

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

Directory
Names

Entry
Codes1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

9.13
7.38

231.9 MM

6.13

1

155.7 MM

Surface Mount
1812 / 1812 P / 1812 AP

Phone
Numbers

1

Flush Mount
1812 / 1812 P / 1812 AP

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

187.5 mm

Wall Mount
1812 / 1812 P / 1812 AP

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Temporary
Codes

Holiday
Schedules

1812

3

N/A

50

0

2

1

No

No

5

No

1812P

27

N/A

0

50

2

0

No

No

10

No

1812AP

27

N/A

0

100

2

2

6 Max

Yes

10

Yes

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits on the 1812. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit RS-485 device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal Identification
Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used as entry codes and are used on the system keypad.

3.

1810 auxiliary input allows a switch closure to activate relay 2, or can be set to auto-dial a preprogrammed telephone number. 1810 AP uses a
standard RS-485 data input.

4.

Six (6) additional entry points can be controlled via RS-485 card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads.

5.

AP Programming software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 12

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

1812 Telephone Entry System

Residential

1812 Classic Systems

1812 AP (ACCESS PLUS ONLY) Expansion Options

1812-081 Surface Mount ........................................... 1598.00

2354-010 Conversion Board ......................................... 180.00

1812-097 Surface Mount w/Camera .......................... 2536.00

1815-235 Conversion Board w/Enclosure .................... 316.00

1812-087 Flush Mount ............................................... 1808.00

Converts 26-bit Wiegand to RS-485. Requires 12-16 VDC power.

1812-088 Wall Mount ................................................ 1808.00
1812-020 12-VDC, 1A Transformer ................................ 51.62
1812 Plus Systems
1812-095 Surface Mount Curved ............................... 1930.00
1812-089 Surface Mount ........................................... 1710.00
1812-098 Surface Mount w/Camera .......................... 2646.00
1812-091 Flush Mount ............................................... 1920.00
1812-093 Wall Mount ................................................ 1920.00
1812 Access Plus Systems
1812-096 Surface Mount Curved ............................... 2040.00
1812-090 Surface Mount ........................................... 1818.00
1812-099 Surface Mount w/Camera .......................... 2758.00
1812-092 Flush Mount ............................................... 2028.00
1812-094 Wall Mount ................................................ 2028.00
Service Connection Options
1800-081 Cellular Voice + Data1,2 ................................. 654.00
1801-080 Cellular Voice Only1,3 ................................... 434.00
1 - Cellular service plan required (provided by DoorKing).
2 - Use with 1812 AP model.

1200-080 Transformer Box........................................... 234.00
1816-083 Intercom Phone Expansion......................... 1144.00
The 1816-083 expands the “No Phone Line” telephone intercom
interface on Access Plus systems from a single phone line up to 11
phone lines. The system can be further expanded to interface with up
to a maximum of 23 phone lines.

RS-485 Card Readers (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1815-332 DK Prox Reader ............................................ 432.00
1815-232 ID Tech Reader ............................................. 504.00
1815-233 AWID Reader ................................................ 516.00
1815-234 HID Reader ................................................... 916.00
RS-485 Keypads (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1513-081 Surface Mount.............................................. 542.00
1513-082 Flush Mount ................................................. 674.00
RS-485 RF Controls (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
8053-080 MicroPlus Receiver ....................................... 218.00

3 - Use with 1812 Classic and Plus models.

Accessories
1812-105 Stainless Steel Surface Mount Housing1....... 266.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount ................... 576.00
2600-588 Heater Kit (for surface mount units) ................. 238.00
2600-582 Heater Kit (for flush mount units) ....................... 52.98
1812-145 CCTV Color Camera .................................... 1022.00
1812-074 Conversion Kit2........................................... 1776.00
1 – Replaces the black steel housing.
2 - Upgrades older 1812 units to an 1812 Access Plus unit.

1830-310 TTY Add-on Factory Installed ....................... 312.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on Kit ............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 13

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1819 Information Telephone System

Commercial

1819
•

Full duplex voice communication

•

Stores a single phone number

•

10 and 11 digit dialing

•

Call button

6.50

5.00

165.10 mm

127.00 mm

INFORMATION

12.00
304.80 mm

Call

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

Surface Mount

1.

Model

Phone
Numbers

Directory

Entry
Codes

Device
Codes

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs

Expansion4

PC
Programmable

Elevator
Control

Transaction
Buffer

1819

1

N/A

0

0

1

0

0

No

No

No

The 1819 is designed as an information phone only. Pressing the CALL button causes the system to dial to a preprogrammed telephone number.

Page 14

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1819 Information Telephone System

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Commercial

1819 Telephone Entry System
1819-080 Surface Mount ........................................... 1422.00
Service Connection Options
1801-080 Cellular Voice1 .............................................. 434.00
1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.

Accessories
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-588 Heater Kit ..................................................... 238.00
1812-145 CCTV Color Camera .................................... 1022.00
1802-111 Post Mount Adapter Plate1 .......................... 166.00
1 - Required if mounting the unit to a goose neck post.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 15

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1816 / 1820 Telephone Intercom Systems

Commercial

1816

1820

•

Full duplex voice communication

•

Full duplex voice communication

•

Interfaces with up to 1200 phone lines

•

Interfaces with up to 1200 phone lines

•

Tennant C.O. phone service not required

•

Tennant C.O. phone service not required

•

Programmable directory codes

•

Programmable directory codes

•

Lobby panel / Doorman caller ID

•

Resident Call Down feature

•

Built-in call waiting

•

Resident programmable Call Forward feature

•

Do Not Disturb feature

•

Resident programmable Do-Not-Disturb Feature

13.25

5.00

336.55 mm

127.00 mm

13.25

5.00

336.55 mm

127.00 mm

35.25
895.35 mm

21.25
539.75 mm

Large Cabinet

Standard Cabinet

Model

Phone
Numbers

Directory
Names

Entry
Codes1

Caller
ID

Relays

Doorman
Phone

1816

1200

N/A

1200

Yes

1

Yes

1820

1200

N/A

1200

Yes

1

Yes

Resident
Call-Down2

Resident
Features3

Call Out
Numbers

Directory
Codes

No

No

10

Programmable

Yes

Yes

10

Programmable

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or secondary keypad) only.

2.

The resident call-down feature allows the resident to contact the doorman directly from their telephone.

3.

Resident programmable features include: Call Waiting; Do-Not-Disturb; Call Forwarding.

Page 16

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1816 / 1820 Telephone Intercom Systems

Commercial

1816 Systems

1820 Systems

Step 1: Main Control Cabinet

Step 1: Main Control Cabinet

1816-080 Houses 13 Relay Boards (156 lines)............ 2216.00

1820-080 Houses 9 Relay Boards (108 lines) .............. 2216.00

1816-082 Houses 5 Relay Boards (60 lines) ............... 1954.00

1820-082 Houses 4 Relay Boards (48 lines) ................ 1954.00

Main control cabinets do not include relay boards.

Main control cabinets do not include relay boards.

Step 2: Relay Boards

Step 2: Line Interface Boards

1982-010

1884-010 .................................................................... 1542.00

1 – 13 Boards ............................................................... 712.00

One (1) relay board is required for every 12 phone lines to be
interfaced.

14 – 29 Boards ............................................................. 672.00
30 + Boards .................................................................. 632.00
One (1) relay board is required for every 12 phone lines to be
interfaced.

Step 3: Decoder Board (if required)
1881-010 Decoder Board ............................................. 326.00
Decoder board(s) are required if the system expands beyond five (5)
relay boards. One (1) decoder board is required for every eight (8)
relay boards beyond the first five (5) relay boards.

Step 4: Auxiliary Cabinet (if required)

Step 3: Power Supply Boards (if required)
1886-010 ...................................................................... 260.00
Only required if more than 21 line interface boards are used; then one
(1) required for every 21 line interface boards in the system thereafter.

1508-060 ........................................................................ 57.80
One (1) required for each 1886-010 power supply board.

Step 4: Auxiliary Cabinet (if required)
1820-081 Large Auxiliary Cabinet ................................. 652.00
Holds up to 12 line interface boards and one (1) power supply board.

1816-081 Auxiliary Cabinet .......................................... 652.00

1820-083 ...................................................................... 396.00

Holds up to 16 relay boards and two (2) decoder boards.

Holds up to eight (8) line interface boards or seven (7) line interface
boards and one (1) power supply board.

Step 5: Phone Blocks and Cables
2370-010 RJ71C Phone Block ....................................... 286.00

Step 5: Phone Blocks and Cables

One (1) RJ71C is required for each relay board in the system.

2370-010 RJ71C Phone Block ....................................... 286.00

1882-042 Connecting Cable ......................................... 144.00

One (1) RJ71C is required for each relay board in the system.

One (1) connecting cable is required for each relay board in the system.

1882-042 Connecting Cable ......................................... 144.00

1882-044 Connecting Cable Special Length .............. 5.20 / ft.

One (1) connecting cable is required for each relay board in the system.

Add cost per foot to 1882-042.

1882-044 Connecting Cable Special Length............... 5.20 / ft.
Add cost per foot to 1882-042.

Step 6: Lobby Panels
Select lobby panels from the 1802, 1803, 1808, 1810 series
pages.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Step 6: Lobby Panels
Select lobby panels from the 1802, 1803, 1808, 1810 series
pages.

Page 17

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1833 Telephone Entry System – 80 Series

Residential, Commercial

1833
•

Full duplex voice communication

•

Three (3) built-in relays

•

Stores up to 3000 phone numbers

•

Two (2) 26-bit wiegand inputs

•

255 area codes

•

Expandable to control up to 24 entrances

•

Programmable directory codes

•

31 security (permission) levels

•

10 and 11 digit dialing

•

32 holiday schedules

•

Built-in clock/calendar

•

True anti-pass back features

11.25

4.50

12.00

3.25

285.75 mm

114.30 mm

304.80 mm

82.55 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

#

*

13.00
330.20 mm

Surface Mount

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

13.25
336.55 mm

Flush Mount

Model

Phone
Numbers

Directory

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Elevator
Control

Transaction
Buffer

1833

3000

N/A

3000

8000

3

2

48 Max

Yes

Yes

8000

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit 26-bit wiegand device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal
Identification Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

3.

1833 has two 26-bit wiegand inputs.

4.

Up to 48 additional entry points can be controlled via card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads using tracker expansion
boards.

5.

Programming and transaction analysis software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 18

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1833 Telephone Entry Systems – 80 Series

Residential, Commercial

1833 Telephone Entry System

Expansion Options

1833-080 Surface Mount ........................................... 3406.00

2358-010 Tracker Expansion Board .............................. 516.00

1833-084 Flush Mount ............................................... 3406.00

2351-080 Sgl Box1 (1 board max) .................................... 698.00
2351-084 Sgl Box1 + 1489-080 2.4 GHz RF Module .... 1142.00

Service Connection Options

2351-085 Sgl Box1 + 1490-080 900 MHz RF Module .. 1142.00

1800-080 Cellular Voice + Data1 ................................... 654.00

2351-082 QUAD Box1 Pre-wired (4 boards max) ........... 1206.00

2334-080 VoIP - TCP/IP Control Box3,5.......................... 522.00
1815-568 VoIP Adapter2,4 ............................................. 128.00
1830-186 Plug & Play3,4 (Plug & Play) ........................... 228.00

1 – Includes one (1) 2358-010 board and 16V, 40 VA transformer.

Expansion Option Wireless Kits

1830-185 Network Adapter (Manual Setup) ................ 228.00

2361-080 Base Board Kit1 2.4 GHz ................................ 576.00

1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.

2333-080 Base Board Kit1 900 MHz .............................. 620.00

2 – DKS VoIP subscription required.

1489-080 Expansion Board Kit2 2.4 GHZ....................... 304.00

3 – DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.

1470-080 Expansion Board Kit2 900 MHZ ..................... 368.00

4 – 1815-568 is required for voice, 1830-186 or 1830-185 is required
for data
5 – Combines the 1815-568 and 1830-186 into a common housing with
built-in ethernet switch.

2364-080 Single channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................. 306.00
2372-080 Dual channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................... 440.00
2332-080 Dual channel repeater 900 MHz................... 578.00
1 - One (1) base board kit is installed in the 1833 controller.

Programming Only Connection Options
1508-055 RS232 to RS422 Conversion Kit .................. 1264.00
1815-037 USB to RS232 Adapter .................................. 180.00
1818-040 RS232 Connecting Cable 6-ft (1.8m) .............. 48.16
Accessories
1803-150 Surface Mount Trim Ring Black .................... 236.00
1814-165 Flush Mount Kit Stainless Steel .................... 396.00
1814-152 Surface Mount Ring for Flush Units.............. 236.00
1701-080 20-Name Directory ....................................... 156.00
1702-080 60-Name Directory ....................................... 228.00
1710-080 Large Directory Surface Mount .................... 484.00
1710-081 Large Directory Flush Mount........................ 484.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount.................... 576.00
1720-080 LED Light Kit ................................................. 444.00

2 – Expansion board kit(s) are installed on each 2358 tracker board.

1514-075 2.4 GHz antenna extension kit ....................... 60.18
1514-079 900 MHz antenna extension kit ..................... 60.18
8064-046 Coax cable extension 13-ft (3.9m).................. 49.38
1514-004 Disk antenna 2.4 GHz ..................................... 36.12
1514-003 Six inch (152mm) antenna 2.4 GHz ................ 54.60
1514-028 Disk antenna 900 MHz ................................... 33.60
1514-019 Six inch (152mm) antenna 900 MHz .............. 33.60
1514-130 Wireless range test kit 2.4 GHz .................... 838.00
Elevator Control
2348-0401 Elevator control board + hardware ........... 2216.00
2348-0802 Lockable enclosure ................................... 2868.00
2348-0813 Lockable enclosure large........................... 3130.00
1 – Includes board and mounting hardware.
2 – Includes one (1) 2348-010 board. Room for two (2) boards’ total.
3 – Includes one (1) 2340-010 board. Room for four (4) boards’ total.

1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00
1812-145 Camera....................................................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on kit .............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1834 Telephone Entry System – 90 Series

Residential, Commercial

1834
•

Larger cabinet, one design

•

Full duplex voice communication

•

Dual locks, double weather seal

•

255 area codes

•

Space for card reader, IP camera, TCP-IP adapter

•

Programmable directory codes

•

Optional 10 ga. hood, stainless steel or black

•

10 and 11 digit dialing

•

Stainless steel flush kit

•

Eight (8) hold open time zones

Model1

Phone
Numbers

1834

3000

Directory
1-Line
Electronic

Entry
Codes2

Device
Codes3

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs4

Expansion

PC
Programmable5

Elevator
Control

Transaction
Buffer

3000

0

2

0

No

Yes

No

8000

1.

Card reader mounting will accommodate the following card readers only: 1815-302 (DK Prox), 1815-380 (HID), 1815-215 (ID-Teck). Note that the
1834 does not have inputs for the card reader. Any card reader installed in the 1834 will have to be connected to another access controller. See
1835 if a built-in card reader is desired.

2.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

3.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit 26-bit wiegand device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal
Identification Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

4.

1834 does not have any 26-bit wiegand inputs.

5.

Programming and transaction analysis software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 20

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1834 Telephone Entry Systems – 90 Series

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Residential, Commercial

1834 Telephone Entry System
1834-090 .................................................................... 3118.00
Service Connection Options
1800-080 Cellular Voice + Data1 ................................... 654.00
2334-080 VoIP - TCP/IP Control Box3,5.......................... 522.00
1815-568 VoIP Adapter2,4 ............................................. 128.00
1830-186 Plug & Play3,4 (Plug & Play) ........................... 228.00
1830-185 Network Adapter (Manual Setup) ................ 228.00
1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.
2 – DKS VoIP subscription required.
3 – DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.
4 – 1815-568 is required for voice, 1830-186 or 1830-185 is required
for data
5 – Combines the 1815-568 and 1830-186 into a common housing with
built-in ethernet switch.

Programming Only Connection Options
1508-055 RS232 to RS422 Conversion Kit .................. 1264.00
1815-037 USB to RS232 Adapter .................................. 180.00
1818-040 RS232 Connecting Cable 6-ft (1.8m) .............. 48.16
Accessories
1814-180 Stainless Steel Hood (10 ga) ......................... 430.00
1814-185 Black Hood (10 ga) ....................................... 214.00
1814-200 Flush Kit (Rough-in box + trim ring).............. 606.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount.................... 576.00
1720-080 LED Light Kit ................................................. 444.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00
1812-147 Camera....................................................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on kit .............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 21

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1834 Telephone Entry System – 80 Series

Residential, Commercial

1834
•

Full duplex voice communication

•

10 and 11 digit dialing

•

Stores up to 3000 phone numbers

•

Two (2) built-in relays

•

255 area codes

•

Eight (8) hold open time zones

•

Programmable directory codes

•

Built-in clock/calendar

11.25

4.75

12.00

3.25

13.25

3.50

285.75 mm

120.65 mm

304.80 mm

82.55 mm

336.55 mm

88.90 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

13.00
330.20 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

15.00
13.25

381.00 mm

336.55 mm
A

A

Z

Z

Call

Call

Surface Mount

Flush Mount

Model

Phone
Numbers

1834

3000

Directory
1-Line
Electronic

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

A
Z
Call

Wall Mount

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

Expansion

PC
Programmable4

Elevator
Control

Transaction
Buffer

3000

0

2

0

No

Yes

No

8000

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit 26-bit wiegand device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal
Identification Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

3.

1834 does not have any 26-bit wiegand inputs.

4.

Programming and transaction analysis software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 22

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1834 Telephone Entry Systems – 80 Series

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Residential, Commercial

1834 Telephone Entry System
1834-080 Surface Mount ........................................... 2852.00
1834-084 Flush Mount ............................................... 2852.00
1834-089 Wall Mount ................................................ 3118.00
Service Connection Options
1800-080 Cellular Voice + Data1 ................................... 654.00
2334-080 VoIP - TCP/IP Control Box3,5.......................... 522.00
1815-568 VoIP Adapter2,4 ............................................. 128.00
1830-186 Plug & Play3,4 (Plug & Play) ........................... 228.00
1830-185 Network Adapter (Manual Setup) ................ 228.00
1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.
2 – DKS VoIP subscription required.
3 – DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.
4 – 1815-568 is required for voice, 1830-186 or 1830-185 is required
for data
5 – Combines the 1815-568 and 1830-186 into a common housing with
built-in ethernet switch.

Programming Only Connection Options
1508-055 RS232 to RS422 Conversion Kit .................. 1264.00
1815-037 USB to RS232 Adapter .................................. 180.00
1818-040 RS232 Connecting Cable 6-ft (1.8m) .............. 48.16
Accessories
1803-150 Surface Mount Trim Ring Black .................... 236.00
1814-165 Flush Mount Kit Stainless Steel .................... 396.00
1814-152 Surface Mount Ring for Flush Units.............. 236.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount.................... 576.00
1720-080 LED Light Kit ................................................. 444.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00
1812-145 Camera (use with flush & wall mount) ............. 1022.00
1812-147 Camera (use with surface mount) ................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on kit .............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 23

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1835 Telephone Entry System – 90 Series

Residential, Commercial

1835
•

Larger cabinet, one design

•

31 security (permission) levels

•

Dual locks, double weather seal

•

32 holiday schedules

•

Space for card reader, IP camera, TCP-IP adapter

•

True anti-pass back features

•

Optional 10 ga. hood, stainless steel or black

•

10 and 11 digit dialing

•

Optional stainless steel flush kit

•

Eight (8) hold open time zones

Model1

Phone
Numbers

1835

3000

Directory

Entry
Codes2

Device
Codes3

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs4

Expansion5

PC
Programmable6

Elevator
Control

Transaction
Buffer

3000

8000

3

2

48 Max

Yes

Yes

8000

1-Line
Electronic

1.

Card reader mounting will accommodate the following card readers only: 1815-302 (DK Prox), 1815-380 (HID), 1815-215 (ID-Teck).

2.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

3.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit 26-bit wiegand device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal
Identification Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

4.

1835 has two 26-bit wiegand inputs.

5.

Up to 48 additional entry points can be controlled via card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads using tracker expansion
boards.

6.

Programming and transaction analysis software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 24

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1835 Telephone Entry Systems – 90 Series

Residential, Commercial

1835 Telephone Entry System

Expansion Options

1835-090 .................................................................... 4434.00

2358-010 Tracker Expansion Board .............................. 516.00
2351-080 Sgl Box1 (1 board max) .................................... 698.00

Service Connection Options

2351-084 Sgl Box1 + 1489-080 2.4 GHz RF Module .... 1142.00

1800-080 Cellular Voice + Data1 ................................... 654.00

2351-085 Sgl Box1 + 1490-080 900 MHz RF Module .. 1142.00

2334-080 VoIP - TCP/IP Control Box3,5.......................... 522.00

2351-082 QUAD Box1 Pre-wired (4 boards max) ........... 1206.00

1815-568 VoIP Adapter2,4 ............................................. 128.00
1830-186 Plug & Play3,4 (Plug & Play) ........................... 228.00
1830-185 Network Adapter (Manual Setup) ................ 228.00

1 – Includes one (1) 2358-010 board and 16V, 40 VA transformer.

Expansion Option Wireless Kits

1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.

2361-080 Base Board Kit1 2.4 GHz ................................ 576.00

2 – DKS VoIP subscription required.

2333-080 Base Board Kit1 900 MHz .............................. 620.00

3 – DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.

1489-080 Expansion Board Kit2 2.4 GHZ....................... 304.00

4 – 1815-568 is required for voice, 1830-186 or 1830-185 is required
for data

1470-080 Expansion Board Kit2 900 MHZ ..................... 368.00

5 – Combines the 1815-568 and 1830-186 into a common housing with
built-in ethernet switch.

2364-080 Single channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................. 306.00
2372-080 Dual channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................... 440.00
2332-080 Dual channel repeater 900 MHz................... 578.00

Programming Only Connection Options
1508-055 RS232 to RS422 Conversion Kit .................. 1264.00
1815-037 USB to RS232 Adapter .................................. 180.00
1818-040 RS232 Connecting Cable 6-ft (1.8m) .............. 48.16
Accessories
1814-180 Stainless Steel Hood (10 ga) ......................... 430.00
1814-185 Black Hood (10 ga) ....................................... 214.00
1814-200 Flush Kit (Rough-in box + trim ring).............. 606.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount.................... 576.00
1720-080 LED Light Kit ................................................. 444.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00
1812-145 Camera....................................................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on kit .............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

1 - One (1) base board kit is installed in the 1833 controller.
2 – Expansion board kit(s) are installed on each 2358 tracker board.

1514-075 2.4 GHz antenna extension kit ....................... 60.18
1514-079 900 MHz antenna extension kit ..................... 60.18
8064-046 Coax cable extension 13-ft (3.9m).................. 49.38
1514-004 Disk antenna 2.4 GHz ..................................... 36.12
1514-003 Six inch (152mm) antenna 2.4 GHz ................ 54.60
1514-028 Disk antenna 900 MHz ................................... 33.60
1514-019 Six inch (152mm) antenna 900 MHz .............. 33.60
1514-130 Wireless range test kit 2.4 GHz .................... 838.00
Elevator Control
2348-0401 Elevator control board + hardware ........... 2216.00
2348-0802 Lockable enclosure ................................... 2868.00
2348-0813 Lockable enclosure large........................... 3130.00
1 – Includes board and mounting hardware.
2 – Includes one (1) 2348-010 board. Room for two (2) boards’ total.
3 – Includes one (1) 2340-010 board. Room for four (4) boards’ total.

Page 25

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1835 Telephone Entry System – 80 Series

Residential, Commercial

1835
•

Full duplex voice communication

•

Three (3) built-in relays

•

Stores up to 3000 phone numbers

•

Two (2) 26-bit wiegand inputs

•

255 area codes

•

Expandable to control up to 24 entrances

•

Programmable directory codes

•

31 security (permission) levels

•

10 and 11 digit dialing

•

32 holiday schedules

•

Built-in clock/calendar

•

True anti-pass back features

11.25

4.75

12.00

3.25

13.25

3.50

285.75 mm

120.65 mm

304.80 mm

82.55 mm

336.55 mm

88.90 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

13.00
330.20 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

15.00
13.25

381.00 mm

336.55 mm
A

A

Z

Z

Call

Call

Surface Mount

Flush Mount

Model

Phone
Numbers

1835

3000

Directory

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

A
Z
Call

Wall Mount

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Elevator
Control

Transaction
Buffer

3000

8000

3

2

48 Max

Yes

Yes

8000

1-Line
Electronic

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit 26-bit wiegand device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal
Identification Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

3.

1835 has two 26-bit wiegand inputs.

4.

Up to 48 additional entry points can be controlled via card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads using tracker expansion
boards.

5.

Programming and transaction analysis software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 26

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1835 Telephone Entry Systems – 80 Series

Residential, Commercial

1835 Telephone Entry System

Expansion Options

1835-080 Surface Mount ........................................... 4180.00

2358-010 Tracker Expansion Board .............................. 516.00

1835-084 Flush Mount ............................................... 4180.00

2351-080 Sgl Box1 (1 board max) .................................... 698.00

1835-089 Wall Mount ................................................ 4434.00

2351-084 Sgl Box1 + 1489-080 2.4 GHz RF Module .... 1142.00
2351-085 Sgl Box1 + 1490-080 900 MHz RF Module .. 1142.00

Service Connection Options
1800-080 Cellular Voice + Data1 ................................... 654.00
2334-080 VoIP - TCP/IP Control Box3,5.......................... 522.00
1815-568 VoIP Adapter2,4 ............................................. 128.00

2351-082 QUAD Box1 Pre-wired (4 boards max) ........... 1206.00
1 – Includes one (1) 2358-010 board and 16V, 40 VA transformer.

Expansion Option Wireless Kits

1830-186 Plug & Play3,4 (Plug & Play) ........................... 228.00

2361-080 Base Board Kit1 2.4 GHz ................................ 576.00

1830-185 Network Adapter (Manual Setup) ................ 228.00

2333-080 Base Board Kit1 900 MHz .............................. 620.00

1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.

1489-080 Expansion Board Kit2 2.4 GHZ....................... 304.00

2 – DKS VoIP subscription required.

1470-080 Expansion Board Kit2 900 MHZ ..................... 368.00

3 – DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.

2364-080 Single channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................. 306.00

4 – 1815-568 is required for voice, 1830-186 or 1830-185 is required
for data

2372-080 Dual channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................... 440.00

5 – Combines the 1815-568 and 1830-186 into a common housing with
built-in ethernet switch.

2332-080 Dual channel repeater 900 MHz................... 578.00
1 - One (1) base board kit is installed in the 1833 controller.
2 – Expansion board kit(s) are installed on each 2358 tracker board.

Programming Only Connection Options
1508-055 RS232 to RS422 Conversion Kit .................. 1264.00
1815-037 USB to RS232 Adapter .................................. 180.00
1818-040 RS232 Connecting Cable 6-ft (1.8m) .............. 48.16
Accessories
1803-150 Surface Mount Trim Ring Black .................... 236.00
1814-165 Flush Mount Kit Stainless Steel .................... 396.00
1814-152 Surface Mount Ring for Flush Units.............. 236.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount.................... 576.00
1720-080 LED Light Kit ................................................. 444.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00
1812-145 Camera (use with flush & wall mount) ............. 1022.00

1514-075 2.4 GHz antenna extension kit ....................... 60.18
1514-079 900 MHz antenna extension kit ..................... 60.18
8064-046 Coax cable extension 13-ft (3.9m).................. 49.38
1514-004 Disk antenna 2.4 GHz ..................................... 36.12
1514-003 Six inch (152mm) antenna 2.4 GHz ................ 54.60
1514-028 Disk antenna 900 MHz ................................... 33.60
1514-019 Six inch (152mm) antenna 900 MHz .............. 33.60
1514-130 Wireless range test kit 2.4 GHz .................... 838.00
Elevator Control
2348-0401 Elevator control board + hardware ........... 2216.00
2348-0802 Lockable enclosure ................................... 2868.00
2348-0813 Lockable enclosure large........................... 3130.00
1 – Includes board and mounting hardware.
2 – Includes one (1) 2348-010 board. Room for two (2) boards’ total.
3 – Includes one (1) 2340-010 board. Room for four (4) boards’ total.

1812-147 Camera (use with surface mount) ................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on kit .............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 27

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1837 Telephone Entry System – 90 Series

Residential, Commercial

1837
•

Larger cabinet, one design

•

31 security (permission) levels

•

Dual locks, double weather seal

•

32 holiday schedules

•

Space for card reader, IP camera, TCP-IP adapter

•

True anti-pass back features

•

Optional 10 ga. hood, stainless steel or black

•

10 and 11 digit dialing

•

Stainless steel flush kit

•

Eight (8) hold open time zones

Model1

Phone
Numbers

1837

3000

Directory

Entry
Codes2

Device
Codes3

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs4

Expansion5

PC
Programmable6

Elevator
Control

Transaction
Buffer

3000

8000

3

2

48 Max

Yes

Yes

8000

8-Line
Electronic

1.

Card reader mounting will accommodate the following card readers only: 1815-302 (DK Prox), 1815-380 (HID), 1815-215 (ID-Teck).

2.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

3.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit 26-bit wiegand device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal
Identification Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

4.

1837 has two 26-bit wiegand inputs.

5.

Up to 48 additional entry points can be controlled via card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads using tracker expansion
boards.

6.

Programming and transaction analysis software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 28

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1837 Telephone Entry Systems – 90 Series

Residential, Commercial

1837 Telephone Entry System

Expansion Options

1837-090 .................................................................... 6406.00

2358-010 Tracker Expansion Board .............................. 516.00
2351-080 Sgl Box1 (1 board max) .................................... 698.00

Service Connection Options

2351-084 Sgl Box1 + 1489-080 2.4 GHz RF Module .... 1142.00

1800-080 Cellular Voice + Data1 ................................... 654.00

2351-085 Sgl Box1 + 1490-080 900 MHz RF Module .. 1142.00

2334-080 VoIP - TCP/IP Control Box3,5.......................... 522.00

2351-082 QUAD Box1 Pre-wired (4 boards max) ........... 1206.00

1815-568 VoIP Adapter2,4 ............................................. 128.00
1830-186 Plug & Play3,4 (Plug & Play) ........................... 228.00
1830-185 Network Adapter (Manual Setup) ................ 228.00

1 – Includes one (1) 2358-010 board and 16V, 40 VA transformer.

Expansion Option Wireless Kits

1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.

2361-080 Base Board Kit1 2.4 GHz ................................ 576.00

2 – DKS VoIP subscription required.

2333-080 Base Board Kit1 900 MHz .............................. 620.00

3 – DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.

1489-080 Expansion Board Kit2 2.4 GHZ....................... 304.00

4 – 1815-568 is required for voice, 1830-186 or 1830-185 is required
for data

1470-080 Expansion Board Kit2 900 MHZ ..................... 368.00

5 – Combines the 1815-568 and 1830-186 into a common housing with
built-in ethernet switch.

2364-080 Single channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................. 306.00
2372-080 Dual channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................... 440.00
2332-080 Dual channel repeater 900 MHz................... 578.00

Programming Only Connection Options
1508-055 RS232 to RS422 Conversion Kit .................. 1264.00
1815-037 USB to RS232 Adapter .................................. 180.00
1818-040 RS232 Connecting Cable 6-ft (1.8m) .............. 48.16
Accessories
1814-180 Stainless Steel Hood (10 ga) ......................... 430.00
1814-185 Black Hood (10 ga) ....................................... 214.00
1814-200 Flush Kit (Rough-in box + trim ring).............. 606.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount.................... 576.00
1720-080 LED Light Kit ................................................. 444.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00
1812-145 Camera....................................................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on kit .............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

1 - One (1) base board kit is installed in the 1833 controller.
2 – Expansion board kit(s) are installed on each 2358 tracker board.

1514-075 2.4 GHz antenna extension kit ....................... 60.18
1514-079 900 MHz antenna extension kit ..................... 60.18
8064-046 Coax cable extension 13-ft (3.9m).................. 49.38
1514-004 Disk antenna 2.4 GHz ..................................... 36.12
1514-003 Six inch (152mm) antenna 2.4 GHz ................ 54.60
1514-028 Disk antenna 900 MHz ................................... 33.60
1514-019 Six inch (152mm) antenna 900 MHz .............. 33.60
1514-130 Wireless range test kit 2.4 GHz .................... 838.00
Elevator Control
2348-0401 Elevator control board + hardware ........... 2216.00
2348-0802 Lockable enclosure ................................... 2868.00
2348-0813 Lockable enclosure large........................... 3130.00
1 – Includes board and mounting hardware.
2 – Includes one (1) 2348-010 board. Room for two (2) boards’ total.
3 – Includes one (1) 2340-010 board. Room for four (4) boards’ total.

Page 29

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1837 Telephone Entry System – 80 Series

Residential, Commercial

1837
•

Full duplex voice communication

•

Three (3) built-in relays

•

Stores up to 3000 phone numbers

•

Two (2) 26-bit wiegand inputs

•

255 area codes

•

Expandable to control up to 24 entrances

•

Programmable directory codes

•

31 security (permission) levels

•

10 and 11 digit dialing

•

32 holiday schedules

•

Built-in clock/calendar

•

True anti-pass back features

11.25

4.75

12.00

3.25

13.25

3.50

285.75 mm

120.65 mm

304.80 mm

82.55 mm

336.55 mm

88.90 mm

15.00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

13.00

13.25

330.20 mm

336.55 mm

A

1

2

3

4

5

6

Z

7

8

9

*

0

#

381.00 mm

A
Z
Call

Call

Surface Mount

Flush Mount

Model

Phone
Numbers

1837

3000

Directory

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

A
Z
Call

Wall Mount

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Elevator
Control

Transaction
Buffer

3000

8000

3

2

48 Max

Yes

Yes

8000

8-Line
Electronic

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit 26-bit wiegand device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal
Identification Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

3.

1837 has two 26-bit wiegand inputs.

4.

Up to 48 additional entry points can be controlled via card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads using tracker expansion
boards.

5.

Programming and transaction analysis software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 30

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1837 Telephone Entry Systems – 80 Series

Residential, Commercial

1837 Telephone Entry System

Expansion Options

1837-080 Surface Mount ........................................... 6140.00

2358-010 Tracker Expansion Board .............................. 516.00

1837-084 Flush Mount ............................................... 6140.00

2351-080 Sgl Box1 (1 board max) .................................... 698.00

1837-089 Wall Mount ................................................ 6406.00

2351-084 Sgl Box1 + 1489-080 2.4 GHz RF Module .... 1142.00
2351-085 Sgl Box1 + 1490-080 900 MHz RF Module .. 1142.00

Service Connection Options
1800-080 Cellular Voice + Data1 ................................... 654.00
2334-080 VoIP - TCP/IP Control Box3,5.......................... 522.00
1815-568 VoIP Adapter2,4 ............................................. 128.00

2351-082 QUAD Box1 Pre-wired (4 boards max) ........... 1206.00
1 – Includes one (1) 2358-010 board and 16V, 40 VA transformer.

Expansion Option Wireless Kits

1830-186 Plug & Play3,4 (Plug & Play) ........................... 228.00

2361-080 Base Board Kit1 2.4 GHz ................................ 576.00

1830-185 Network Adapter (Manual Setup) ................ 228.00

2333-080 Base Board Kit1 900 MHz .............................. 620.00

1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.

1489-080 Expansion Board Kit2 2.4 GHZ....................... 304.00

2 – DKS VoIP subscription required.

1470-080 Expansion Board Kit2 900 MHZ ..................... 368.00

3 – DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.

2364-080 Single channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................. 306.00

4 – 1815-568 is required for voice, 1830-186 or 1830-185 is required
for data

2372-080 Dual channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................... 440.00

5 – Combines the 1815-568 and 1830-186 into a common housing with
built-in Ethernet switch.

2332-080 Dual channel repeater 900 MHz................... 578.00
1 - One (1) base board kit is installed in the 1833 controller.
2 – Expansion board kit(s) are installed on each 2358 tracker board.

Programming Only Connection Options
1508-055 RS232 to RS422 Conversion Kit .................. 1264.00
1815-037 USB to RS232 Adapter .................................. 180.00
1818-040 RS232 Connecting Cable 6-ft (1.8m) .............. 48.16
Accessories
1803-150 Surface Mount Trim Ring Black .................... 236.00
1814-165 Flush Mount Kit Stainless Steel .................... 396.00
1814-152 Surface Mount Ring for Flush Units.............. 236.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount.................... 576.00
1720-080 LED Light Kit ................................................. 444.00
1804-193 External Speaker .......................................... 202.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52
2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00
1812-145 Camera (use with flush & wall mount) ............. 1022.00

1514-075 2.4 GHz antenna extension kit ....................... 60.18
1514-079 900 MHz antenna extension kit ..................... 60.18
8064-046 Coax cable extension 13-ft (3.9m).................. 49.38
1514-004 Disk antenna 2.4 GHz ..................................... 36.12
1514-003 Six inch (152mm) antenna 2.4 GHz ................ 54.60
1514-028 Disk antenna 900 MHz ................................... 33.60
1514-019 Six inch (152mm) antenna 900 MHz .............. 33.60
1514-130 Wireless range test kit 2.4 GHz .................... 838.00
Elevator Control
2348-0401 Elevator control board + hardware ........... 2216.00
2348-0802 Lockable enclosure ................................... 2868.00
2348-0813 Lockable enclosure large........................... 3130.00
1 – Includes board and mounting hardware.
2 – Includes one (1) 2348-010 board. Room for two (2) boards’ total.
3 – Includes one (1) 2340-010 board. Room for four (4) boards’ total.

1812-147 Camera (use with surface mount) ................... 1022.00
1807-012 Handset Kit (surface mount only) ..................... 422.00
1830-315 TTY Add-on kit .............................................. 348.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 31

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1838 Access Controller

Commercial

1838
•

Stores up to 3000 user names

•

Two (2) built-in relays control relays

•

Programmable directory codes

•

Two (2) 26-bit wiegand inputs

•

Built-in clock/calendar

•

Expandable to control up to 24 entrances

•

Voice communication capability

•

31 security (permission) levels

•

Optional plug-in programming display

•

32 holiday schedules

•

True anti-pass back features

12.25

4.25

311.15 mm

107.95 mm

10.25
260.35 mm

Model

User
Names

Directory

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Elevator
Control

Transaction
Buffer

1838

3000

N/A

3000

8000

2

2

48 Max

Yes

Yes

8000

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit 26-bit wiegand device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal
Identification Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

3.

1838 has two 26-bit wiegand inputs.

4.

Up to 48 additional entry points can be controlled via card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads using tracker expansion
boards.

5.

Programming and transaction analysis software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 32

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

1838 Access Controller

Commercial

1838 Access Controller

Expansion Options

1838-081 Surface Mount ........................................... 2098.00

2358-010 Tracker Expansion Board .............................. 516.00
2351-080 Sgl Box1 (1 board max) .................................... 698.00

Service Connection Options

2351-084 Sgl Box1 + 1489-080 2.4 GHz RF Module .... 1142.00

1800-080 Cellular Voice + Data1 ................................... 654.00

2351-085 Sgl Box1 + 1490-080 900 MHz RF Module .. 1142.00

2334-080 VoIP - TCP/IP Control Box3,5.......................... 522.00

2351-082 QUAD Box1 Pre-wired (4 boards max) ........... 1206.00

1815-568 VoIP Adapter2,4 ............................................. 128.00
1830-186 Plug & Play3,4 (Plug & Play) ........................... 228.00
1830-185 Network Adapter (Manual Setup) ................ 228.00

1 – Includes one (1) 2358-010 board and 16V, 40 VA transformer.

Expansion Option Wireless Kits

1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.

2361-080 Base Board Kit1 2.4 GHz ................................ 576.00

2 – DKS VoIP subscription required.

2333-080 Base Board Kit1 900 MHz .............................. 620.00

3 – DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.

1489-080 Expansion Board Kit2 2.4 GHZ....................... 304.00

4 – 1815-568 is required for voice, 1830-186 or 1830-185 is required
for data

1470-080 Expansion Board Kit2 900 MHZ ..................... 368.00

5 – Combines the 1815-568 and 1830-186 into a common housing with
built-in Ethernet switch.

2364-080 Single channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................. 306.00
2372-080 Dual channel repeater 2.4 GHz .................... 440.00
2332-080 Dual channel repeater 900 MHz................... 578.00

Programming Only Connection Options
1508-055 RS232 to RS422 Conversion Kit .................. 1264.00
1815-037 USB to RS232 Adapter .................................. 180.00
1818-040 RS232 Connecting Cable 6-ft (1.8m) .............. 48.16
Call Stations1, 2
1838-120 Call station w/keypad................................... 868.00
1838-121 Call Station w/ID Tech card reader............... 700.00
1838-122 Call station w/AWID card reader.................. 686.00
1838-123 Call station w/HID card reader ..................... 926.00
1838-124 Call station w/DK Prox card reader .............. 602.00
1494-010 Microphone combiner3 .................................. 72.24
1 – Provides voice communication via telephone communication.

1 - One (1) base board kit is installed in the 1833 controller.
2 – Expansion board kit(s) are installed on each 2358 tracker board.

1514-075 2.4 GHz antenna extension kit ....................... 60.18
1514-079 900 MHz antenna extension kit ..................... 60.18
8064-046 Coax cable extension 13-ft (3.9m).................. 49.38
1514-004 Disk antenna 2.4 GHz ..................................... 36.12
1514-003 Six inch (152mm) antenna 2.4 GHz ................ 54.60
1514-028 Disk antenna 900 MHz ................................... 33.60
1514-019 Six inch (152mm) antenna 900 MHz .............. 33.60
1514-130 Wireless range test kit 2.4 GHz .................... 838.00
Elevator Control

2 – Requires active telephone line.

2348-0401 Elevator control board + hardware ........... 2216.00

3 – Use if two call stations will share the same telephone line.

2348-0802 Lockable enclosure ................................... 2868.00
2348-0813 Lockable enclosure large........................... 3130.00

Accessories
1838-220 1 x 20 LCD Programming Display .................. 868.00
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount................ 444.00

1 – Includes board and mounting hardware.
2 – Includes one (1) 2348-010 board. Room for two (2) boards’ total.
3 – Includes one (1) 2340-010 board. Room for four (4) boards’ total.

1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount.................... 576.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 Ah ......................... 91.52

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 33

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1838 Access Plus Controller

Residential, Commercial

1838 AP
•

Stores up to 100 user names

•

Control up to 8 entry points

•

Programmable directory codes

•

IP Addressable

•

Built-in clock/calendar

•

PC Programmable

•

Voice communication capability

•

2-Digit directory codes

•

Optional plug-in programming display

•

20-digit dialing

•

Includes 16 VAC power transformer

12.25

4.25

311.15 mm

107.95 mm

10.25
260.35 mm

Model

Phone
Numbers

Directory
Names

Entry
Codes1

Device
Codes2

Relays

Auxiliary
Inputs3

Expansion4

PC
Programmable5

Temporary
Codes

Holiday
Schedules

1838 AP

27

N/A

50

100

2

2

6 Max

Yes

10

Yes

1.

Entry codes are four (4) digits only and are not the same as device codes. Entry codes grant access when entered on the entry system keypad (or
secondary keypad) only.

2.

Device codes refer to any five (5) digit RS-485 device used to access an entry point, such as cards, transmitters or PINs (Personal Identification
Number). Five (5) digit device codes can also be used on the system keypad.

3.

1838 AP uses a standard RS-485 data input.

4.

Six (6) additional entry points can be controlled via RS-485 card readers, AVID tag readers, RF receivers or digital keypads.

5.

AP Programming software available for free download at doorking.com.

Page 34

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

1838 Access Plus Controller

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Residential, Commercial

1838 Access Plus Controller

1838 AP (ACCESS PLUS ONLY) Expansion Options

1838-095 Surface Mount ........................................... 1866.00

2354-010 Conversion Board ......................................... 180.00
1815-235 Conversion Board w/Enclosure .................... 316.00

Service Connection Options
1800-081 Cellular Voice + Data1 ................................... 654.00
1815-568 VoIP Adapter2............................................... 128.00
1 – DKS Cellular subscription required.

Converts 26-bit Wiegand to RS-485. Requires 12-16 VDC power.

1812-020 12-VDC, 1A Transformer ................................ 51.62
1200-080 Transformer Box .......................................... 234.00

2 – DKS VoIP subscription required.

1816-083 Intercom Phone Expansion ........................ 1144.00
The 1816-083 expands the “No Phone Line” telephone intercom
interface on Access Plus systems from a single phone line up to 11
phone lines. The system can be further expanded to interface with up
to a maximum of 23 phone lines.

RS-485 Card Readers (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)1815-332 DK Prox
Reader
412.00
1815-232 ID Tech Reader ............................................. 504.00
1815-233 AWID Reader................................................ 516.00
1815-234 HID Reader ................................................... 916.00
RS-485 Keypads (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1513-081 Surface Mount ............................................. 542.00
1513-082 Flush Mount ................................................. 674.00
RS-485 RF Controls (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
8053-080 MicroPlus Receiver ....................................... 218.00

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 35

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Connection Options
Cellular, TCP/IP Network, VoIP

Cellular1

TCP/IP Network Adapters

1800-080 Voice + Data ................................................. 654.00

1830-185 (Manual setup) .............................................228.00

1800-081 Voice + Data (AP models only)...................... 654.00

1830-1861 (Plug & Play) ................................................228.00

1801-080 Voice only ..................................................... 434.00

1. DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.

1. Cellular subscription required.

VoIP Adapter
VoIP – TCP/IP Control

Box1,2

2334-080 VoIP – TCP/IP Control Box ............................ 522.00

1815-5681 .....................................................................128.00
1. DKS VoIP subscription required.

1 – DKS VoIP or Data over IP subscription required.
2 – Combines the 1815-568 and 1830-186 into a common housing with
built-in ethernet switch.

Page 36

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

Model 2348
Elevator Control

13.25

5.00

367 mm

127 mm

13.25

5.00

367 mm

127 mm

35.25
895 mm

7.50
190 mm

21.25
540 mm

10.63
270 mm

2348-010

2348-080

2348-081

Elevator Control Board
2348-040 ....................................................................2216.00
•

Includes mounting hardware.

Enclosures1
2348-080 ....................................................................2868.00
•

Maximum two (2) 2348 boards.

2348-081 ....................................................................3130.00
•

Maximum four (4) 2348 boards.

1. Includes one (1) 2348 control board and power transformer.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 37

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Expansion Boards
Tracker Expansion Boards

4.63

5.50

118 mm

140 mm

14.25

4.00

362 mm

102 mm

6.00

3.63

24.38

152 mm

92 mm

619 mm

9.00
229 mm

2358-010

2351-080
2351-084
2351-085

2351-082

Tracker Expansion Board
2358-010 ...................................................................... 516.00
Enclosures
2351-080 ...................................................................... 698.00
•

Includes one (1) 2358-010 board and 16V, 20 VA
transformer.

2351-084 .................................................................... 1142.00
•

Includes one (1) 2358-010 board, 1489-080 RF Module,
2.4 GHz and 16V, 20 VA transformer.

2351-085 .................................................................... 1018.00
•

Includes one (1) 2358-010 board, 1470-080 RF Module,
900 MHz and 16V, 20 VA transformer.

2351-082 .................................................................... 1206.00
•

Includes one (1) 2358-010 board and 16V, 40 VA
transformer.

•

Can hold a maximum four (4) 2358-010 boards.

•

Pre-wired.

Page 38

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

Wireless Kits
Tracker Expansion Board Wireless Kits

2.4 GHz

6.89

4.75
4.75

175 mm

121 mm

121 mm

2.44
62 mm

4.92

3.50

3.88

125 mm

89 mm

98 mm

2.88
73 mm

2361-080 Baseboard

1489-080 Expansion

2364-080 Repeater

2372-080 Repeater

900 MHz

6.89
175 mm

4.75
121 mm

2.44
62 mm

4.92
3.88

125 mm

98 mm

2.88
73 mm

2333-080 Baseboard

2332-080 Repeater

1470-080 Expansion

Baseboard Kits

Accessories

2361-080 2.4 GHz ......................................................... 576.00

1514-075 Antenna Kit 2.4 GHz ....................................... 60.18

2333-080 900 MHz ....................................................... 620.00

1514-079 900 MHz ......................................................... 60.18

•

Plugs into the 1830 series control board.

•

Includes antenna kit and vandal resistant disk antenna.

Expansion Board Kits
1489-080 2.4 GHz ......................................................... 304.00
1470-080 900 MHz ....................................................... 368.00
•

Plugs into the 2358 expansion board.

•

Includes 6-inch and vandal resistant disk antenna.

Single Channel Repeater
2364-080 2.4 GHz ......................................................... 306.00
•

Extends the range when a single 1489 kit is in use.

Dual Channel Repeaters
2372-080 2.4 GHz ......................................................... 440.00
2332-080 900 MHz ....................................................... 578.00
•

Extends the range when multiple 1470 or 1489 kits are
in use.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

•

Includes 6-inch antenna, mounting bracket and 13-feet
cable.

8064-046 Extension Cable .............................................. 49.38
•

Use with 1514-075 and 1514-079.

Antennas
1514-003 6-inch Antenna 2.4 GHz ................................. 54.60
1514-004 Disk Antenna 2.4 GHz..................................... 36.12
1514-019 6-inch Antenna 900 MHz................................ 33.60
1514-028 Disk Antenna 900 MHz ................................... 33.60
Field Range Test Kit 2.4 GHz only
1514-130 ...................................................................... 838.00
•

Includes a simulated Baseboard Kit, simulated
Expansion Board Kit and 1514-075 Antenna Kit.

•

Use to verify a good wireless connection between base
and remote stations.

Page 39

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Mounting Kits
Telephone Entry System Mounting Kits
Use with 1803, 1810 and 1833, 1834, 1835, 1837 - 80 Series only
13.50

3.75

14.50

3.88

12.00

2.63

343 mm

95 mm

368 mm

98 mm

305 mm

67 mm

15.25

13.25

387 mm

336 mm

16.00
406 mm

13.50
343 mm

1803-150

1814-152

1814-165

Use with 1834, 1835, 1837 - 90 Series only
13.08

5.61

15.34

3.76

332 MM

142.5 MM

389.6 MM

95.25 MM

14.88
378 MM

17.27
378 MM

1814-180 / 1814-185
1814-200

80 Series Only

90 Series Only

Surface Mount Trim Ring - Black

Hood – Stainless Steel

1803-150 ...................................................................... 236.00

1814-180 ...................................................................... 430.00

•

Use with surface mount 1803, 1810, 1833, 1834, 1835
and 1837 80 Series only.

•

Use with 1834-090, 1835-090 and 1837-090 systems
only.

Flush Kit Stainless Steel

Hood – Black

1814-165 ...................................................................... 396.00

1814-185 ...................................................................... 214.00

•

Use with flush mount 1803, 1810, 1833, 1834, 1835 and
1837 80 Series only.

•

Use with 1834-090, 1835-090 and 1837-090 systems
only.

Surface Mount Adapter for Flush Units

Flush Kit Stainless Steel (rough-in box + trim ring)

1814-152 ...................................................................... 236.00

1814-200 ...................................................................... 606.00

•

Allows a flush mount unit to be mounted directly to a
flat surface. Indoor use only.

•

Use with flush mount 1803, 1810, 1833, 1834, 1835 and
1837 80 Series only.

Page 40

•

Use with 1834-090, 1835-090 and 1837-090 systems
only.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Model 1720
Telephone Entry System LED Light Kit

LED Light Kit - Long
1720-080 ......................................................................444.00
•

Use with surface mount 1803, 1810, 1833, 1834, 1835
and 1837 systems.

LED Light Kit - Short
1720-081 ......................................................................432.00
•

Use with add-on directory.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 41

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Model 1701 / 1702 / 1710
Add-On Directories

Add-On Directories – Non-Lighted

Lighted Directory Mounting Accessories

1701-080 ...................................................................... 156.00

1803-150 Surface Mount recess kit.............................. 236.00

•

20 name capacity.

1702-080 ...................................................................... 228.00
•

60 name capacity.

•

Use with the 1710-080 directory.

1814-165 Flush Mount kit ............................................ 396.00
•

Use with the 1710-081 directory.

Add-On Directories – LED Lighted
1710-080 Surface Mount .............................................. 484.00
1710-081 Flush Mount ................................................. 484.00
•

These directories use 8-1/2 x 11 sheet paper. Make
your own directory with a word processor program.

Page 42

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

General Purpose Utility Enclosures
Telephone Entry System Accessories

14.25

362 mm

9.00
229 mm

0102-080

0102-081

292 mm

6.63

311 mm

619 mm

152 mm

11.50

12.25

24.38

6.00

168 mm

10.25

9.88

260 mm

251 mm

0102-083

0102-082

12.25
311 mm

0102-084

General purpose enclosures have no power receptacles or
terminal strips, carry no warranty and are not listed.
0102-080 Small lockable metal enclosure ....................136.00
0102-081 Large lockable metal enclosure ....................378.00
0102-082 Medium lockable metal enclosure................184.00
0102-083 Small lockable plastic enclosure ...................164.00
0102-084 Medium lockable plastic enclosure ..............184.00

Part Number

Height

Width

Depth

Material

Lockable

0102-080

9.00
(229mm)

6.00
(152mm)

3.63
(92mm)

Metal

Yes

0102-081

24.38
(619mm)

14.25
(362mm)

4.00
(102mm)

Metal

Yes

0102-082

10.25
(260mm)

12.25
(311mm)

4.25
(108mm)

Metal

Yes

0102-083

9.88
(251mm)

6.63
(168mm)

4.00
(102mm)

Plastic

Yes

0102-084

12.25
(311mm)

11.50
(292mm)

6.00
(152mm)

Plastic

Yes

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 43

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Accessories
Handset Kits, Isolation Transformers, Miscellaneous, CCTV Camera Kits
Handset Conversion Kit

CCTV Camera Kit – High Resolution

1807-012 ...................................................................... 422.00

1812-145 ....................................................................1022.00

Handset, adapter, hanger and speaker cover

High resolution color camera kit (camera, mounting bracket,
wire harness, power supply)

Replacement Handset

Use this camera with the following models:

1807-006 ...................................................................... 328.00

1504-080, 1504-081, 1504-082, 1504-083, 1504-084,
1504-085, 1504-086, 1504-090, 1504-091, 1504-120,
1504-121, 1504-122, 1504-123, 1504-124
1802-082, 1802-089, 1802-090, 1802-091, 1802-092

Isolation Transformers

1803-080, 1803-084, 1803-090, 1803-092

1830-140 ........................................................................ 77.04

1808-081, 1808-082, 1808-083, 1808-084, 1808-085

Use with 1810, 1833, 1838
1808, 1810, 1812 Access Plus Systems

1810-084, 1810-090, 1810-096
1812-083, 1812-084, 1812-088, 1812-093, 1812-094

1830-142 ........................................................................ 77.04

1819-080

Use with 1834, 1835, 1837

1833-080, 1833-084
1834-084, 1834-089
1835-084, 1835-089

Miscellaneous
1506-081 Secondary Keypad surface mount ................ 444.00
1506-091 Secondary Keypad flush mount .................... 576.00
1801-008 Backup Battery 12-Volt .8 AH ......................... 91.52
1804-193 External Speaker........................................... 202.00

1837-080, 1837-084, 1837-089
1838-120, 1838-021, 1838-122, 1838-123, 1838-124
CCTV Camera Kit – High Resolution
1812-147 ....................................................................1022.00

Use in high noise areas

High resolution color camera kit (camera, mounting bracket,
wire harness, power supply)

2600-584 Heater Kit ..................................................... 170.00

Use this camera with the following models:

2600-588 Heater Kit ..................................................... 238.00

1810-080, 1810-088, 1810-095

2600-582 LCD Heater Kit ................................................ 52.98

1812-076, 1812-077, 1812-078, 1812-079, 1812-081,
1812-085, 1812-086, 1812-087, 1812-089, 1812-090,
1812-091, 1812-092, 1812-095, 1812-096, 1812-097

1816-070 Line Sense Relay ............................................. 52.98
2600-657 Replacement Key 16120 ................................... 7.60

1815-247, 1815-248, 1815-249, 1815-250, 1815-251
1834-080, 1834-090
1835-080, 1835-090

Key Lock Sets (Lock + 2 Keys)
4001-035 Lock #16120 (standard key lock) .................... 21.24
4001-038 Lock #16121 ................................................... 21.24
4001-039 Lock #16122 ................................................... 21.24
4001-041 Lock #16123 ................................................... 21.24
4001-042 Lock #16124 ................................................... 21.24
4001-043 Lock #16125 ................................................... 21.24

1837-090
1838-228
Video Adapter
1812-039 ......................................................................506.00
Converts coax to twisted pair for wire runs of up to 3000-ft
(B/W) or 1600-ft (color), two required

4001-044 Lock #16126 ................................................... 21.24
4001-045 Lock #16127 ................................................... 21.24
4001-046 Lock #16128 ................................................... 21.24
4001-047 Lock #16129 ................................................... 21.24
4001-048 Lock #16130 ................................................... 21.24

Page 44

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

Page Rev 1/2/19

Replacement Components
Electronic Components
Circuit Boards

Keypads

1862-010 .................................................................... 1012.00
Use with 1802, 1802-EPD, 1803, 1808, 1810, 1819

1895-016...................................................................... 140.00

1863-010 ...................................................................... 722.00
Use with all “P” series lobby panels
1871-010 .................................................................... 1474.00
Use with 1812 Classic only

Keypad with letters
1895-017...................................................................... 140.00
Keypad no letters
1895-019...................................................................... 132.00

1971-010 .................................................................... 1474.00
Use with 1812 Plus only

Keypad 10-pin

1885-010 .................................................................... 1806.00
Use with 1816 and 1820 only

Ribbon cable for 1895-016 & 1895-017

1833-010 .................................................................... 1806.00

Keypad (no letters) & ribbon cable

1804-038........................................................................ 25.28
1804-155...................................................................... 156.00

Use with 1833 only

1804-156...................................................................... 156.00

1834-010 .................................................................... 1926.00

Keypad (with letters) & ribbon cable

Use with 1834-080 and 1834-084 only

1895-032...................................................................... 150.00
Keypad, green back lighted

1834-009 .................................................................... 1926.00
Use with 1834-089 and 1834-090 only
1835-010 .................................................................... 2216.00
Use with 1835-080 and 1835-084 only
1835-009 .................................................................... 2216.00

1895-060...................................................................... 328.00
Lighted keypad-green, A-Z-CALL button retrofit kit
1804-158...................................................................... 158.00
Lighted keypad-green, retrofit kit

Use with 1835-089 and 1835-090 only
1837-010 .................................................................... 1806.00
Use with 1837 only
1838-010 .................................................................... 1832.00
Use with 1838 only
1970-010 .................................................................... 1714.00
Use with 1802 AP, 1808 AP, 1810 AP, 1812 AP, 1838 AP
2354-010 ...................................................................... 180.00
RS-485 to Wiegand interface board

LCD Displays
1891-010 Single-Line 20 Character .............................. 842.00
Use with 1834, 1835
1896-012 Eight-Line 20 Character ................................ 842.00
Use with 1837 only
1890-010 Single-Line 8 Character ................................ 278.00
Use with 1802, 1803 and 1810
1902-010 Single-Line 16 Character .............................. 402.00
Use with 1802 EPD only

Miscellaneous
1998-020 ......................................................................106.00
Replacement microphone kit
1998-010 ......................................................................106.00
Replacement microphone board
1997-190 ........................................................................12.64
Microphone wire harness for 1998-010 only
1804-290 ........................................................................28.90
5-watt speaker (square)
1817-190 ........................................................................40.92
Oval speaker
1815-016 ........................................................................25.24
Ribbon cable for 1896-018 display

LED Light Kits
1804-700 ........................................................................ 62.62
Use with 1810 surface mount
1804-701 ........................................................................ 24.08
Use with 1802
1804-702 ........................................................................ 43.34
Use with 1808, 1834, 1835 surface mount
1804-703 ........................................................................ 43.34
Use with 1710 directory
1804-704 ........................................................................ 24.08
Use with 1812
1804-707 ........................................................................ 43.34
Use with 1810 flush mount

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 45

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Telephone Entry & Access Control Systems

January 2019

Blank Page

Page 46

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Section A3
This Price Schedule is effective January 7, 2019.

Access Control Devices
Date

Page

1-2-19

All

Comment
January, 2019 Price Schedule update.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 1

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page 2

January 2019

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Table of Contents
Card Readers
DK Prox Proximity Card Readers............................................................................................................................. 4
HID Card Readers.................................................................................................................................................... 6
AWID Card Readers ................................................................................................................................................ 8
ID-Teck Card Readers ........................................................................................................................................... 10

Keypads
Digital Key Pads .................................................................................................................................................... 12

RF Controls
MicroPlus RF Controls .......................................................................................................................................... 14
MicroClik RF Controls ........................................................................................................................................... 16

Miscellaneous Controls
Key Switches ......................................................................................................................................................... 18
Exit Push Buttons .................................................................................................................................................. 19
Postal & Fire Department Lock Boxes .................................................................................................................. 20

Door and Gate Locks
1200 Lb. Magnetic Door Locks ............................................................................................................................. 22
600 Lb. Magnetic Door Locks ............................................................................................................................... 23
300 Lb. Mini-locks, 2000 Lb. Shear Lock ............................................................................................................... 24
1200 Lb, 600 Lb. Magnetic gate Locks .................................................................................................................. 25
Electric Dead-bolts and Door Strikes .................................................................................................................... 26
Magnetic Door Backup Power Supplies................................................................................................................ 27

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 3

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

DK Prox Card Readers

26-Bit Wiegand Output

Relay Output (Stand Alone)

1815-300 Up to 3-inch range ........................................ 138.00

1520-084...................................................................... 782.00

1815-301 Up to 4-inch range ........................................ 138.00

1520-081 Controller only ............................................. 722.00

1815-302 Up to 2-inch range ........................................ 138.00

•

1520 reader/controller can store up to 1000 card codes

1815-330 (1815-300 reader w/enclosure) .................... 258.00

•

3600 event history buffer

1815-333 (1815-330 w/expansion board) .................... 836.00

•

Built-in programming keypad

1815-350 Up to 25-feet range .................................... 2948.00

•

Timed anti-pass back, hold open time zones

1504-124 (1815-300 w/intercom substation) ............... 614.00
1524-080 (1524-331 w/enclosure)............................... 470.00
RS-485 Output (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)

1524-331 ..................................................................... 348.00

1815-332 Up to 3-inch range ........................................ 432.00

1815-340 Replacement Programmer ............................. 57.34

1815-235 (2354-010 w/enclosure) ............................... 316.00

•

1524 reader can store up to 1000 card codes

2354-010 (26-Bit Wiegand to RS-485 converter) .......... 180.00

•

Use 1815-340 hand held programmer to add / delete
individual cards or blocks of cards

Page 4

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

DK Prox Cards
Cards are sold in blocks of 50 only.
These cards are factory pre-coded. Card numbers may, or
may not be, in numerical sequence.
1508-120 Clamshell Cards
50-100.............................................................................. 5.06
150-500............................................................................ 4.66
550-950............................................................................ 4.26
1000+ ............................................................................... 3.86
1508-121 ISO Graphics Cards
50-100.............................................................................. 7.00
150-500............................................................................ 6.60
550-950............................................................................ 6.20
1000+ ............................................................................... 5.80
1508-123 Key Tags
50-100.............................................................................. 7.48
150-500............................................................................ 7.08
550-950............................................................................ 6.68
1000+ ............................................................................... 6.28
UHF DK Prox Cards
These cards are factory pre-coded. Card numbers may, or
may not be, in numerical sequence.
1508-191 ISO Card UHF Only ......................................... 12.02
1508-198 ISO Card UHF/DK Prox Dual Tech ................... 14.20
1815-318 Windshield Holder ........................................... 4.36
1815-319 Rearview Mirror Holder ................................... 4.36
1508-191 can only be used with 1815-350 card reader. 1508-198 dual
technology card can be used with both 1815-350 and all other DK Prox
card readers.

Special Order cards are sold in blocks of 100 only.
DK Prox Cards - Special Order1
These cards include sequential coding, specific card
numbers and specific start / stop numbering sequences.
1508-127 Clamshell Cards
50-100 .............................................................................. 7.48
150-500 ............................................................................ 7.08
550-950 ............................................................................ 6.68
1000+ ............................................................................... 6.28
1508-128 ISO Graphics Cards
50-100 .............................................................................. 9.40
150-500 ............................................................................ 9.00
550-950 ............................................................................ 8.60
1000+ ............................................................................... 8.20
1508-129 Key Tags
50-100 .............................................................................. 9.90
150-500 ............................................................................ 9.50
550-950 ............................................................................ 9.10
1000+ ............................................................................... 8.70
UHF DK Prox Cards – Special Order1
These cards include sequential coding, specific card
numbers and specific start / stop numbering sequences.
1508-190 ISO Card UHF Only ......................................... 14.20
1508-197 ISO Card UHF/DK Prox Dual Tech ................... 16.38
1815-318 Windshield Holder ........................................... 4.36
1815-319 Rearview Mirror Holder ................................... 4.36
1508-195 Headlight Tag
1-50 ................................................................................ 13.10
51-150 ............................................................................ 12.30
151-500 .......................................................................... 11.50

DKProx Card Identifier for PC
1815-640...................................................................... 126.00

501-999 .......................................................................... 10.70
1000+ ............................................................................... 9.90

This stand-alone accessory connects to a PC via a USB cable and will
read the card code when presented to the identifier. This is useful for
cards that have no numbers printed on them or the card number has
worn off.

1508-199 License Plate Tag

Requires software, for free download go to:
http://www.doorking.com/accessories/access-controlaccessories/dkprox-card-identifier

151-500 .......................................................................... 11.50

1-50 ................................................................................ 13.10
51-150 ............................................................................ 12.30
501-999 .......................................................................... 10.70
1000+ ............................................................................... 9.90
1508-191, 1508-195 and 1508-199 can only be used with 1815-350
card reader. 1508-198 dual technology cards can be used with both
1815-350 and all other DK Prox card readers.
Note 1: Special orders cannot be returned for credit.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 5

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

HID Proximity Card Readers

26-Bit Wiegand Output

Relay Output (Stand Alone)

1815-380 (ProxPoint Plus) Up to 3-inch range .............. 326.00

1520-082.................................................................... 1058.00

1815-381 (MiniProx) Up to 5-inch range ...................... 638.00

1520-081 Controller only ............................................. 722.00

1815-382 (ThinLine) Up to 5-inch range ....................... 612.00

•

1520 reader/controller can store up to 1000 card codes

1815-390 (1815-382 reader w/enclosure) .................... 704.00

•

3600 event history buffer

1815-392 (1815-390 w/expansion board) .................. 1222.00

•

Built-in programming keypad

1504-123 (1815-382 w/intercom substation) ............... 796.00

•

Timed anti-pass back, hold open time zones

1815-395 (MaxiProx) Up to 6-feet range .................... 1926.00
•

Use 1508-014 Active Tags with 1815-395

RS-485 Output (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1815-234 (ThinLine) Up to 5-inch range ....................... 916.00
1815-235 (2354-010 w/enclosure) ............................... 316.00
2354-010 (26-Bit Wiegand to RS-485 converter) .......... 180.00

Page 6

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

HID Prox Cards
Cards are sold in blocks of 50 only.

Special order cards are sold in blocks of 100 only.

HID Prox Cards
These cards are factory pre-coded. Card numbers may, or
may not be, in numerical sequence.

HID Prox Cards - Special Order1
These cards include sequential coding, specific card
numbers and specific start / stop numbering sequences.

1508-018 ProxCard Clamshell Cards

1508-143 ProxCard Clamshell Cards

50-100.............................................................................. 7.48

50-100 .............................................................................. 9.90

150-500............................................................................ 7.08

150-500 ............................................................................ 9.50

550-950............................................................................ 6.68

550-950 ............................................................................ 9.10

1000+ ............................................................................... 6.28

1000+ ............................................................................... 8.70

1508-017 Prox ISO Graphics Cards

1508-144 Prox ISO Graphics Cards

50-100............................................................................ 11.82

50-100 ............................................................................ 14.22

150-500.......................................................................... 11.42

150-500 .......................................................................... 13.82

550-950.......................................................................... 11.02

550-950 .......................................................................... 13.42

1000+ ............................................................................. 10.62

1000+ ............................................................................. 13.02

1508-016 ProxKey Key Tags

1508-145 ProxKey Key Tags

50-100............................................................................ 12.30

50-100 ............................................................................ 14.70

150-500.......................................................................... 11.90

150-500 .......................................................................... 14.30

550-950.......................................................................... 11.50

550-950 .......................................................................... 13.90

1000+ ............................................................................. 11.10

1000+ ............................................................................. 13.50
1508-014 ProxPass Active Tags (use with 1815-395 only)
1-9 .................................................................................. 95.86
10-30 .............................................................................. 92.86
40-100 ............................................................................ 89.96
110-490 .......................................................................... 86.96
500+ ............................................................................... 83.96
Note 1: Special orders cannot be returned for credit.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 7

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

AWID Proximity Card Readers

26-Bit Wiegand Output

RS-485 Output (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)

1815-280 (SR 2400) Up to 4-inch range ........................ 218.00

1815-233 Up to 3-inch range ....................................... 516.00

1815-281 (SP 6820) Up to 8-inch range ........................ 390.00

1815-235 (2354-010 w/enclosure)............................... 316.00

1815-282 (MM 6800) Up to 2-inch range ..................... 390.00

2354-010 (26-Bit Wiegand to RS-485 converter) ......... 180.00

1815-290 (1815-280 reader w/enclosure) .................... 326.00
1815-292 (1815-290 w/expansion board) .................... 842.00
1815-283 (MR 1824) Up to 24 inch range..................... 782.00
1815-284 (MR 1824 MC) Up to 16 inch range .............. 964.00
1504-122 (1815-281 w/intercom substation) ............... 694.00

Page 8

Relay Output (Stand Alone)
1520-080 ...................................................................... 868.00
1520-081 Controller only ............................................. 722.00
•

1520 reader/controller can store up to 1000 card codes

•

3600 event history buffer

•

Built-in programming keypad

•

Timed anti-pass back, hold open time zones

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

AWID Prox Cards
Cards are sold in blocks of 50 only.

AWID Prox Cards
These cards are factory pre-coded. Card numbers may, or
may not be, in numerical sequence.

Special order cards are sold in blocks of 100 only.

AWID Prox Cards - Special Order1 (minimum 100)
These cards include sequential coding, specific card
numbers and specific start / stop numbering sequences.

1508-020 Prox-Linc Clamshell Cards

1508-132 Prox-Linc Clamshell Cards

50-100.............................................................................. 6.26

50-100 .............................................................................. 8.68

150-500............................................................................ 5.86

150-500 ............................................................................ 8.28

550-950............................................................................ 5.46

550-950 ............................................................................ 7.88

1000+ ............................................................................... 5.06

1000+ ............................................................................... 7.48

1508-021 Prox-Linc GR ISO Graphics Cards

1508-133 Prox-Linc GR ISO Graphics Cards

50-100.............................................................................. 9.52

50-100 ............................................................................ 11.92

150-500............................................................................ 9.12

150-500 .......................................................................... 11.52

550-950............................................................................ 8.72

550-950 .......................................................................... 11.12

1000+ ............................................................................... 8.32

1000+ ............................................................................. 10.72

1508-022 Prox-Linc KT Key Tags

1508-134 Prox-Linc KT Key Tags

50-100............................................................................ 10.12

50-100 ............................................................................ 12.52

150-500............................................................................ 9.72

150-500 .......................................................................... 12.12

550-950............................................................................ 9.32

550-950 .......................................................................... 11.72

1000+ ............................................................................... 8.92

1000+ ............................................................................. 11.32
Note 1: Special orders cannot be returned for credit.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 9

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

ID-Teck Proximity Card Readers

26-Bit Wiegand Output

Relay Output (Stand Alone)

1815-215 (RF Tiny) Up to 3-inch range ......................... 228.00

1520-081 Controller only ............................................. 722.00

1815-216 (RF 10) Up to 3-inch range ............................ 228.00

•

1520 reader/controller can store up to 1000 card codes

1815-217 (RF 20) Up to 3-inch range ............................ 228.00

•

3600 event history buffer

1815-218 (RF 30) Up to 12 inch range .......................... 626.00

•

Built-in programming keypad

1815-230 (1815-216 reader w/enclosure) .................... 322.00

•

Timed anti-pass back, hold open time zones

1815-231 (1815-230 w/expansion board) .................... 826.00
1504-121 (1815-217 w/intercom substation) ............... 700.00

RS-485 Output (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
1815-232 Up to 3-inch range ........................................ 504.00
1815-235 (2354-010 w/enclosure) ............................... 316.00
2354-010 (26-Bit Wiegand to RS-485 converter) .......... 180.00

Page 10

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

ID-Teck Prox Cards
Note: cards will work with the following ID-Teck Prox readers only:
1815-215, 1815-216, 1815-217, 1815-218, 1815-230, 1815-231, 1504-121
Cards are sold in blocks of 50 only.

Special order cards are sold in blocks of 100 only.

ID-Teck Prox Cards
These cards are factory pre-coded. Card numbers may, or
may not be, in numerical sequence.

ID-Teck Prox Cards - Special Order1
These cards include sequential coding, specific card
numbers and specific start / stop numbering sequences.

1508-110 RF 170 Clamshell Cards

1508-136 RF 170 Clamshell Cards

50-100.............................................................................. 7.32

50-100 .............................................................................. 9.74

150-500............................................................................ 6.92

150-500 ............................................................................ 9.34

550-950............................................................................ 6.52

550-950 ............................................................................ 8.94

1000+ ............................................................................... 6.12

1000+ ............................................................................... 8.54

1508-111 RF 80 ISO Graphics Cards

1508-137 RF 80 ISO Graphics Cards

50-100............................................................................ 11.82

50-100 ............................................................................ 14.22

150-500.......................................................................... 11.42

150-500 .......................................................................... 13.82

550-950.......................................................................... 11.02

550-950 .......................................................................... 13.42

1000+ ............................................................................. 10.62

1000+ ............................................................................. 13.02

1508-112 RF 50 Key Tags

1508-138 RF 50 Key Tags

50-100............................................................................ 12.52

50-100 ............................................................................ 14.94

150-500.......................................................................... 12.12

150-500 .......................................................................... 14.54

550-950.......................................................................... 11.72

550-950 .......................................................................... 14.14

1000+ ............................................................................. 11.32

1000+ ............................................................................. 13.74
Note 1: Special orders cannot be returned for credit.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 11

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Keypads

Page 12

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

Keypads

26-Bit Wiegand Output

Relay Output (Stand Alone)

These keypads must be connected to a 26-bit wiegand
controller, such as the DK 1830 Series. They are not standalone devices.

These keypads use a dry relay(s) contact and are designed
to be used as a stand-alone device.

1815-053 (Silver finish) ................................................ 890.00

1506-086 Surface Mount ............................................. 662.00

1815-054 (Black finish)................................................. 890.00

1506-096 Flush Mount ................................................. 796.00

•

Vandal resistant, piezoelectric, 5-12 VDC.

1504-086 Surface Mount w/intercom substation ........ 820.00

•

Mounts on single-gang electric box.

1504-096 Flush Mount w/intercom substation .......... 1012.00

1815-059 Surface Mount ............................................. 412.00
•

NFC programming with DK Manager app (free from
Google Play store), Android only.

•

Low power solar mode.

1815-051 Surface Mount ............................................. 532.00
1815-052 Flush Mount ................................................. 662.00
1504-120 Surface Mount w/intercom substation ........ 808.00
1815-247 Surface Mount ........................................... 1034.00
•

Keypad with ID Tech (1815-216) card reader.

1815-248 Surface Mount ........................................... 1072.00
•

Keypad with AWID (1815-281) card reader.

1815-249 Surface Mount ........................................... 1192.00
•

Keypad with HID (1815-382) card reader.

•

2 Form C dry contact relays.

•

1000 four (4) digit entry codes.

•

6 five (5) digit entry codes.

•

Hold open codes.

•

Time zone inputs.

1515-080 Surface Mount ............................................. 390.00
1515-081 Surface Mount ............................................. 520.00
1515-082 Flush Mount ................................................. 642.00
1504-081 Surface Mount w/intercom substation ........ 668.00
1504-091 Flush Mount w/intercom substation ............ 732.00
•

1 Form C dry contact relay.

•

400 four (4) or five (5) digit entry codes.

•

Hold open codes.

•

NFC programming with DK Manager app (free from
Google Play store), Android only.

•

Low power solar mode.

1815-250 Surface Mount ............................................. 990.00
•

Keypad with DK Prox (1815-300) card reader.

RS-485 Output (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)
These keypads must be connected to a RS-485 controller,
such as the DK Access Plus Series. They are not stand-alone
devices.

Secondary Keypad
These keypads can only be used with DK telephone entry
systems.
1506-081 Surface Mount ............................................. 444.00
1506-091 Flush Mount ................................................. 576.00

1513-081 Surface Mount ............................................. 542.00
1513-082 Flush Mount ................................................. 674.00
1815-235 (2354-010 w/enclosure)............................... 316.00
2354-010 (26-Bit Wiegand to RS-485 converter) ......... 180.00

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 13

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

MicroPLUS RF Controls

26-Bit Wiegand Output

Relay Output (Stand Alone)

8040-080 ...................................................................... 194.00

8040-080 100 Transmitter codes ................................. 194.00

•

5300 Transmitter codes.

•

Program via the “learn” method.

•

26, 30 or 31-bit wiegand format.

•

Individual codes cannot be deleted.

8040-090 ...................................................................... 194.00

8054-081 50 Transmitter codes ................................... 390.00

•

5300 Transmitter codes.

8054-082 100 Transmitter codes ................................. 458.00

•

26, 30 or 31-bit wiegand format.

8054-083 250 Transmitter codes ................................. 520.00

•

Compatible with Elite Series1 DT-418 transmitters.

8054-084 500 Transmitter codes ................................. 584.00

1. Elite Series is a registered trademark of The Chamberlain Group, Inc.

8054-085 1000 Transmitter codes ............................... 652.00
8054-086 1250 Transmitter codes ............................... 714.00

RS-485 Output (ACCESS PLUS ONLY)

•

Built-in time clock, 10 programmable time zones.

8053-080 ...................................................................... 218.00

•

2300 event history buffer.

•

Can be connected to a serial printer.

•

5300 Transmitter codes.

Receiver Accessories
8057-110 Lockable outdoor enclosure ......................... 116.00
1514-073 Coax Antenna kit ............................................ 57.80
1514-072 High Gain antenna 318 MHz ........................ 208.00
8052-080 Antenna Amplifier 318 MHz ......................... 240.00

Page 14

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

MicroPlus Transmitters / ProxMitters (Transmitter w/proximity card reader built-in)
IMPORTANT! The prices shown are for block-coded transmitters ordered in multiples of 10 only. Add $3.00 per
transmitter for any order specifying transmitter numbering sequence or facility codes.

8069-080 1 Button

8069-087 1 Button w/DK Prox Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 37.80

10-30 .............................................................................. 47.26

40-100............................................................................ 35.80

40-100 ............................................................................ 45.26

110+ ............................................................................... 31.80

110+ ............................................................................... 41.26

8070-080 2 Button

8070-087 2 Button w/DK Prox tag

10-30.............................................................................. 39.90

10-30 .............................................................................. 49.36

40-100............................................................................ 37.90

40-100 ............................................................................ 47.36

110+ ............................................................................... 33.90

110+ ............................................................................... 43.36

8071-080 3 Button

8071-087 3 Button w/DK Prox Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 42.00

10-30 .............................................................................. 51.46

40-100............................................................................ 40.00

40-100 ............................................................................ 49.46

110+ ............................................................................... 36.00

110+ ............................................................................... 45.46

8069-082 1 Button w/AWID Tag

8069-084 1 Button w/HID Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 47.26

10-30 .............................................................................. 47.26

40-100............................................................................ 45.26

40-100 ............................................................................ 45.26

110+ ............................................................................... 41.26

110+ ............................................................................... 41.26

8070-082 2 Button w/AWID Tag

8070-084 2 Button w/HID Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 49.36

10-30 .............................................................................. 49.36

40-100............................................................................ 47.36

40-100 ............................................................................ 47.36

110+ ............................................................................... 43.36

110+ ............................................................................... 43.36

8071-082 3 Button w/AWID Tag

8071-084 3 Button w/HID Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 51.46

10-30 .............................................................................. 51.46

40-100............................................................................ 49.46

40-100 ............................................................................ 49.46

110+ ............................................................................... 45.46

110+ ............................................................................... 45.46

8069-086 1 Button w/IDTeck Tag

MicroPlus Visor Clips (Black)

10-30.............................................................................. 47.26

8069-075

40-100............................................................................ 45.26

1-30 .................................................................................. 3.96

110+ ............................................................................... 41.26

31-100 .............................................................................. 3.46

8070-086 2 Button w/IDTeck Tag

101+ ................................................................................. 2.96

10-30.............................................................................. 49.36
40-100............................................................................ 47.36
110+ ............................................................................... 43.36
8071-086 3 Button w/IDTeck Tag
10-30.............................................................................. 51.46
40-100............................................................................ 49.46
110+ ............................................................................... 45.46

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 15

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

MicroClik RF Controls

26-Bit Wiegand Output

Relay Output (Stand Alone)

8040-080 ...................................................................... 194.00

8040-080 100 Transmitter codes ................................. 194.00

•

5300 Transmitter codes.

•

Program via the “learn” method.

•

26, 30 or 31-bit wiegand format.

•

Individual codes cannot be deleted.

8040-090 ...................................................................... 194.00

8057-081 50 Transmitter codes ................................... 326.00

•

5300 Transmitter codes.

8057-082 100 Transmitter codes ................................. 390.00

•

26, 30 or 31-bit wiegand format.

8057-083 250 Transmitter codes ................................. 452.00

•

Compatible with Elite Series1 DT-418 transmitters.

8057-084 500 Transmitter codes ................................. 520.00

1. Elite Series is a registered trademark of The Chamberlain Group, Inc.

8057-085 1000 Transmitter codes ............................... 584.00
8057-086 5000 Transmitter codes ............................... 652.00
8057-088 16,000 Transmitter codes ............................ 714.00
•

Built-in time clock, 10 programmable time zones.

•

2300 event history buffer.

•

Can be connected to a serial printer.

Receiver Accessories
8057-110 Lockable outdoor enclosure ......................... 116.00
1514-073 Coax Antenna kit ............................................ 57.80
1514-072 High Gain antenna 318 MHz ........................ 208.00
8052-080 Antenna Amplifier 318 MHz ......................... 240.00

Page 16

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

MicroClik Transmitters / ProxMitters (Transmitter w/proximity card reader built-in)
IMPORTANT! The prices shown are for block-coded transmitters ordered in multiples of 10 only. Add $3.00 per
transmitter for any order specifying transmitter numbering sequence or facility codes.

8066-080 1 Button

8066-085 1 Button w/DK Prox Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 39.90

10-30 .............................................................................. 49.36

40-100............................................................................ 37.90

40-100 ............................................................................ 47.36

110+ ............................................................................... 33.90

110+ ............................................................................... 43.36

8067-080 2 Button

8067-085 2 Button w/DK Prox Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 42.00

10-30 .............................................................................. 51.46

40-100............................................................................ 40.00

40-100 ............................................................................ 49.46

110+ ............................................................................... 36.00

110+ ............................................................................... 45.46

8068-080 3 Button

8068-085 3 Button w/DK Prox Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 44.10

10-30 .............................................................................. 53.56

40-100............................................................................ 42.10

40-100 ............................................................................ 50.56

110+ ............................................................................... 38.10

110+ ............................................................................... 46.56

8066-082 1 Button w/AWID Tag

8066-083 1 Button w/HID Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 49.36

10-30 .............................................................................. 49.36

40-100............................................................................ 47.36

40-100 ............................................................................ 47.36

110+ ............................................................................... 43.36

110+ ............................................................................... 43.36

8067-082 2 Button w/AWID Tag

8067-083 2 Button w/HID Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 51.46

10-30 .............................................................................. 51.46

40-100............................................................................ 49.46

40-100 ............................................................................ 49.46

110+ ............................................................................... 45.46

110+ ............................................................................... 45.46

8068-082 3 Button w/AWID Tag

8068-083 3 Button w/HID Tag

10-30.............................................................................. 53.56

10-30 .............................................................................. 53.56

40-100............................................................................ 50.56

40-100 ............................................................................ 50.56

110+ ............................................................................... 46.56

110+ ............................................................................... 46.56

8066-084 1 Button w/IDTeck Tag

MicroClik Visor Clips (Gray)

10-30.............................................................................. 49.36

8066-075

40-100............................................................................ 47.36

1-30 .................................................................................. 3.96

110+ ............................................................................... 43.36

31-100 .............................................................................. 3.46

8067-084 2 Button w/IDTeck Tag

101+ ................................................................................. 2.96

10-30.............................................................................. 51.46
40-100............................................................................ 49.46
110+ ............................................................................... 45.46
8068-084 3 Button w/IDTeck Tag
10-30.............................................................................. 53.56
40-100............................................................................ 50.56
110+ ............................................................................... 46.56

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 17

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Key Switches

Mortise Key Cylinder

Ace Key Cylinder

1206-080 ........................................................................ 99.34

1210-080 ...................................................................... 260.00

•

N.O. or N.C. operation.

•

N.O. or N.C. operation.

•

Mounts in single-gang electric box.

•

Surface mount non-lighted enclosure.

•

Indoor use only.

•

Indoor or outdoor use.

1207-080 ...................................................................... 260.00
•

N.O. or N.C. operation.

•

Surface mount non-lighted enclosure.

•

Indoor or outdoor use.

1209-080 ...................................................................... 444.00
•

N.O. or N.C. operation.

•

Surface mount lighted enclosure.

•

Indoor or outdoor use.

•

Intercom substation.

Page 18

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

Push Buttons

2.81

2.50

1.50

2.50

2.81

1.25

71 mm

63 mm

38 mm

63 mm

71 mm

32 mm

4.56

EXIT

EXIT

4.56

EXIT

1211-081

1211-080

4.56

No
Touch

116 mm

116 mm

116 mm

1211-083

2.75

1.25

1.75

1.25

70 mm

32 mm

44 mm

32 mm

PUSH TO

4.50

4.50
EXIT

114 mm

1211-090

EXIT

114 mm

1211-091

Push Button Switch

Piezoelectric Switch

1211-080........................................................................ 62.62

1211-090 ...................................................................... 360.00

•

Stainless steel faceplate.

•

Vandal resistant stainless steel faceplate.

•

Mounts in single-gang electric box.

•

Selectable illumination status (red, green).

•

Requires 12-VDC power to illuminate exit button.

•

Mounts in single-gang electric box.

•

Indoor use only.

•

Requires 12-24 VDC power.

1211-081........................................................................ 57.80

1211-091 ...................................................................... 360.00

•

Stainless steel faceplate.

•

Vandal resistant stainless steel faceplate.

•

Mullion mount.

•

Selectable illumination status (red, green).

•

Requires 12-VDC power to illuminate exit button.

•

Mullion mount.

•

Indoor use only.

•

Requires 12-24 VDC power.

1211-083...................................................................... 108.00
•

No Touch exit button.

•

Stainless steel faceplate.

•

Mounts in single-gang electric box.

•

Requires 12-VDC power.

•

Indoor use only.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Lock Boxes

4.50

3.63

4.50

5.38

114 mm

92 mm

114 mm

136 mm

FIRE

5.38
136 mm

DEPT
1400-080

FIRE
DEPT

5.00

2.38

127 mm

60 mm

6.50

5.38

POSTAL
LOCK BOX

136 mm

1401-080

165 mm

1402-080

Fire Department Lock Box

Postal Service Lock Box

1400-080.......................................................................122.00

1402-080 ...................................................................... 132.00

•

Accepts Fire Department padlock.

•

Accepts standard postal key lock.

•

Surface or post mounted.

•

Surface or post mount.

•

Painted bright red.

•

Painted Postal blue.

•

Constant contact switch when padlock is removed and
the door is open.

•

Postal lock can be installed to either activate a door or
gate, or simply open the postal box.

1401-080.......................................................................122.00
•

Accepts Knox 3501 key switch.

•

Surface or post mounted.

•

Faceplate painted bright red.

Page 20

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Replacement Components

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Electronic Components

LED Light Kits
1804-701 ........................................................................ 24.08
Use with 1209, 1504, 1506
1804-705 ........................................................................ 24.08
Use with 1520 and lighted card readers
1804-706 ........................................................................ 24.08
Use with 1503

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 21

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Magnetic Door Locks
1200 Lb (544 Kg) Door Locks
1.88
48 mm

10.50

1.56

7.88

3.00

10.50

267 mm

40 mm

200 mm

76 mm

267 mm

DKML-S12-1

2.63

1.56

67 mm

40 mm

BO1-S12

21.00

10.50

533 mm

267 mm

DKML-S12-2

2.63

3.00

1.50

76 mm

38 mm

BO2-S12

7.25

2.00

184 mm

51 mm

3.00

67 mm

2.00
BO3-S12

76 mm

51 mm

1.00
25 mm

10.50
267 mm

BO4-S12S6

1.50
38 mm

0.56
14 mm

10.50
267 mm
BO5-S12S6

0.75
19 mm

Single Door Locks Surface Mount

Mounting Brackets

DKML-S12-1 .................................................................. 374.00

BO1-S12 Armature Bracket ............................................ 57.80

DKML-S12-1L ................................................................ 462.00

BO2-S12 L Bracket.......................................................... 57.80

DKML-S12-1LT .............................................................. 490.00

BO4-S12S6 Angle Bracket .............................................. 64.22
BO5-S12S6 Spacer Bar ................................................... 51.96

Dual Door Locks Surface Mount

BO3-S12 L & Z Bracket Kit ............................................ 142.00

DKML-S12-2 .................................................................. 732.00
DKML-S12-2L ................................................................ 912.00

Back-up Power Supply / Charger

DKML-S12-2LT .............................................................. 958.00

1215-130 12/24 Volt @ 1 Amp .................................... 288.00
1215-131 12/24 Volt @ 2.5 Amp ................................. 494.00

•

Locks operate on 12 or 24 Volt DC power.

1215-132 12/24 Volt @ 3 Amp .................................... 614.00

•

“L” includes LED status indicator.

1215-133 12/24 Volt @ 6 Amp .................................... 890.00

•

“T” includes built-in time delay.

•

Requires two (2) 12 Volt, 7 Ah SLA batteries (not
included).

DC Lock Power Transformers
1812-020 12 Volt, 1000 mA ........................................... 51.62
1812-139 24 Volt, 500 mA ............................................. 55.56

Page 22

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

Magnetic Door Locks
600 Lb (272 Kg) Door Locks
1.13
29 mm

9.88
251 mm

DKML-S6-1

1.06

7.88

27 mm

200 mm

251 mm

BO1-S6

1.88
48 mm

9.88

2.00

54 mm

1.88

1.06

48 mm

1.13

27 mm

29 mm

19.69

9.88

7.25

2.00

500 mm

251 mm

184 mm

51 mm

DKML-S6-2

1.88

BO2-S6

2.00

1.88
48 mm

48 mm

BO3-S6

51 mm

1.00
9.00

1.06

10.50

500 mm

27 mm

267 mm

DKML-M6-1

1.50

BO4-S12S6

25 mm

1.50
38 mm

38 mm

0.56
14 mm

10.50
267 mm
BO5-S12S6

0.75
19 mm

Single Door Locks Surface Mount

Mounting Brackets

DKML-S6-1 ....................................................................344.00

BO1-S6 Armature Bracket .............................................. 57.80

DKML-S6-1L ..................................................................384.00

BO2-S6 L Bracket ............................................................ 57.80

DKML-S6-1LT ................................................................424.00

BO4-S12S6 Angle Bracket............................................... 64.22
BO5-S12S6 Spacer Bar.................................................... 51.96

Single Door Locks Mortise Mount

BO3-S6 L & Z Bracket Kit .............................................. 142.00

DKML-M6-1 ..................................................................284.00
DKML-M6-1L .................................................................310.00
DKML-M6-1LT ...............................................................338.00

Back-up Power Supply / Charger
1215-130 12/24 Volt @ 1 Amp .................................... 288.00
1215-131 12/24 Volt @ 2.5 Amp ................................. 494.00

Dual Door Locks Surface Mount

1215-132 12/24 Volt @ 3 Amp .................................... 614.00

DKML-S6-2 ....................................................................670.00

1215-133 12/24 Volt @ 6 Amp .................................... 890.00

DKML-S6-2L ..................................................................758.00
DKML-S6-2LT ................................................................820.00
•

Locks operate on 12 or 24 Volt DC power.

•

“L” includes LED status indicator.

•

“T” includes built-in time delay.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

•

Requires two (2) 12 Volt, 7 Ah SLA batteries (not
included).

DC Lock Power Transformers
1812-020 12 Volt, 1000 mA ........................................... 51.62
1812-139 24 Volt, 500 mA ............................................. 55.56

Page 23

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Magnetic Door Locks
300 Lb (136 Kg) Mini-locks and 2000 Lb (907 Kg) Shear Lock

7.13

0.81

10.66

1.13

181 mm

21 mm

271 mm

29 mm

DKML-S3-1

1.38

1.50

35 mm

38 mm

7.38

0.88

181 mm

22 mm

9.69

1.13

246 mm

29 mm

1.38
DKSL-M20-1L

35 mm

DKML-M3-1

1.19
30 mm

300 Lb. Door Locks

Back-up Power Supply / Charger

DKML-S3-1 Surface Mount ........................................... 286.00

1215-130 12/24 Volt @ 1 Amp..................................... 288.00

DKML-M3-1 Mortise Mount ......................................... 286.00

1215-131 12/24 Volt @ 2.5 Amp.................................. 494.00
1215-132 12/24 Volt @ 3 Amp..................................... 614.00

2000 Lb. Shear Lock Surface Mount
DKSL-M20-1L ................................................................ 548.00
•

Locks operate on 12 or 24 Volt DC power.

•

Shear lock includes LED status indicator and built-in
signal relay.

1215-133 12/24 Volt @ 6 Amp..................................... 890.00
•

Requires two (2) 12 Volt, 7 Ah SLA batteries (not
included).

DC Lock Power Transformers
1812-020 12 Volt, 1000 mA............................................ 51.62
1812-139 24 Volt, 500 mA.............................................. 55.56

Page 24

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

Magnetic Gate Locks
600 Lb (272 Kg) and 1200 Lb (544 Kg) Gate Locks

10.50

1.56

10.50

0.25

267 mm

40 mm

267 mm

6 mm

1216 -080 / 1216-081
DKGL-S12-1 / DKGL-S12-1L

BO1-GL12

2.63

2.63

67 mm

67 mm

8.00

1.63

267 mm

41 mm

7.56

0.25

192 mm

6 mm

BO2-GL12

DKGL-S6-1

1.75

2.63
67 mm

44 mm

1200 Lb. Gate Lock Kits Surface Mount

Mounting Brackets

1216-080...................................................................... 474.00

BO1-GL12 Lock Bracket .................................................. 80.26

1216-081...................................................................... 560.00

BO2-GL12 Armature Bracket .......................................... 68.80

•

1216-081 has built-in signal relay.

•

Kits include predrilled and tapped mounting brackets,
BO1-GL12 and BO2-GL12.

DC Lock Power Transformers - Regulated
1812-020 12 Volt, 1000 mA ............................................ 51.62
1812-139 24 Volt, 500 mA .............................................. 55.56

1200 Lb. Gate Locks Top, Bottom or Face Mount
DKGL-S12-1 .................................................................. 396.00
DKGL-S12-1L w/Signal Relay ........................................ 486.00

600 Lb. Gate Lock Face Mount Only
DKGL-S6-1 w/Signal Relay ............................................ 368.00
•

Gate locks operate on 12 or 24 Volt DC power.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 25

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Electric Door Locks
Dead-bolts and Strikes

1.50

1.63

38 mm

41 mm

7.94
202 mm

1.50

1.63

38 mm

41 mm

1.00

1.19

1.75

1.50

25 mm

30 mm

44 mm

38 mm

9.06
230 mm

6.25

4.88

159 mm

124 mm

DKEB-M-1

DKES-C1

DKEB-M-1L
DKEB-M-1D
DKEB-M-1LD

DKES-C2

Dead-bolt Door Locks

Electric Strikes 11/32 inch (8.74 mm) keeper

DKEB-M-1 ..................................................................... 404.00

DKES-C1-1FX................................................................... 69.82

DKEB-M-1L.................................................................... 424.00

DKES-C1-1FS ................................................................... 72.24

DKEB-M-1D ................................................................... 424.00
DKEB-M-1LD ................................................................. 444.00

Electric Strikes 20/32 inch (15.88 mm) keeper
DKES-C2-1FX................................................................... 86.68

•

“L” includes sensor to indicate locked or unlocked
condition.

•

“D” includes door sensor to indicate an open or closed
door.

Page 26

DKES-C2-1FS ................................................................... 90.30
•

FX = Fail Secure

•

FS = Fail Safe

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

Page Rev 1/2/19

Magnetic Door Lock Power Supply
Power Supply / Battery Charger
13.00

3.25

330 mm

83 mm

13.50
343 mm

Magnetic Door Lock Power Supplies1
1215-130 12/24 Volt @ 1 Amp .....................................288.00
1215-131 12/24 Volt @ 2.5 Amp ..................................494.00
1215-132 12/24 Volt @ 3 Amp .....................................614.00
1215-133 12/24 Volt @ 6 Amp .....................................890.00
•

Requires two (2) 12 Volt, 7 Ah SLA batteries (not
included).

Agency Listings
Agency

1215-130

1215-131

1215-132

1215-133

UL 294 Access Control Systems

X

X

X

X

CSA C22.2 No. 205-M1983

X

X

X

X

MEA NYC Dept. of Building Safety

X

X

X

X

NFPA 101 Life Safety

X

UL 603 Burglar Alarm Systems

X

X

UL 1069 Hospital Signaling / Nurse Call Equipment

X

X

UL 1481 Power Supply for Fire Signaling Systems

X

X

X

CSFM California State Fire Marshall Approved

X

X

X

NFPA 72

X

X

X

X

X

FM Approved

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 27

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Access Control Devices

January 2019

Blank Page

Page 28

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Accessories

Section A4
This Price Schedule is effective January 7, 2019.

Accessories
Date

Page

1-2-19

All

Comment
January, 2019 Price Schedule update.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 1

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Accessories

Page 2

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Accessories

Table of Contents
Mounting Posts
Standard & Heavy-Duty Posts ................................................................................................................................ 4
Designer Style Posts ............................................................................................................................................... 5
Kiosks ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6

Transformers
Transformer Box ..................................................................................................................................................... 7
Transformers .......................................................................................................................................................... 7

Surge Suppressers / Timers
Surge Suppressers .................................................................................................................................................. 8
7-Day Timer ............................................................................................................................................................ 8

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 3

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Accessories

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Mounting Posts
Standard & Heavy-Duty Posts
13.00
330 mm

14.00

13.00

356 mm

14.00

330 mm

356 mm

74.00
1880 mm

45.00
1143 mm

49.00

45.00
1143 mm

41.75

1245 mm

53.00
1346 mm

1060 mm

24.00
610 mm

1200-045
1200-046 (not shown)

1200-049

1200-037
1200-038 (not shown)

1200-036

Standard Posts

Heavy-Duty Posts

1200-050
1200-051 (not shown)

1200-056
1200-057

1200-045 Pad Mount ................................................... 258.00

1200-036 Pad Mount ................................................... 564.00

1200-046 In-Ground Mount ......................................... 258.00

1200-037 Pad Mount ................................................... 602.00

1200-049 Dual Height Pad Mount................................ 542.00

1200-038 In-Ground Mount ......................................... 520.00

•

Standard posts are constructed from 2 x 2 (51 mm)
steel stock.

•

In-ground mount posts do not have a baseplate and
extend an additional 24 inches (610 mm) in length.

1200-050 Pad Mount ................................................... 496.00
1200-051 In-Ground Mount ......................................... 432.00
•

Heavy-duty posts are constructed from 4 x 4 (102 mm)
steel stock.

•

In-ground mount posts do not have a baseplate and
extend an additional 24 inches (610 mm) in length.

In-Ground Adapter
1200-057 (use with 1200-045) ..................................... 228.00
•

In-ground adapters provide a mount for posts with a
baseplate.

In-Ground Adapter
1200-056 (use with pad mount posts) ......................... 348.00
•

1802 Adapter Plate

In-ground adapters provide a mount for posts with a
baseplate.

1802-111...................................................................... 166.00
•

Page 4

Use this plate with when mounting 1802, 1802-EPD and
1819 systems to these posts.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Accessories

Page Rev 1/2/19

Mounting Posts
Designer Style Mounting Posts

14.00
356 mm

59.00
48.00

1499 mm

49.50

1219 mm

1257 mm

24.00
610 mm

1200-086

1200-085

1200-087

1200-058

1200-150

Designer Style Posts

Accessories

1200-085 Pad Mount ..................................................1724.00

1200-087 Light Tower Extension .................................. 700.00

1200-086 Pad Mount ..................................................1806.00

1200-150 Light Assembly ............................................. 470.00

•
•

Standard posts are constructed from 4 x 8 (102 mm x
203 mm) steel stock.
Electrical compartment has four (4) accessory outlets
and room for surge suppressers and RF receiver.

In-Ground Adapter
1200-058 ......................................................................712.00
•

•

Tower extension does not include light assembly.

•

Fluorescent light with photocell for automatic dusk to
dawn operation.

Replacement Post Cap
1200-053 ...................................................................... 132.00

In-ground adapters provide a mount for posts with a
baseplate.

1802 Adapter Plate
1802-111 ......................................................................166.00
•

Use this plate with when mounting 1802, 1802-EPD and
1819 systems to these posts.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 5

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Accessories

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Mounting Posts
Kiosks

Kiosk Style Posts1
1200-160 .................................................................... 4284.00
•

Use with 1802 and 1802-EPD flush mount systems only.

1200-170 .................................................................... 4516.00
•

Use with 1803, 1810, 1833, 1834, 1835 and 1837 flush
mount systems 80 Series systems only.

1200-175 .................................................................... 4516.00
•

Use with 1812 Classic, 1812 Plus and 1812 Access Plus
flush mount systems only.

1. All kiosks include LED illumination and have an electrical compartment has four
(4) accessory outlets and room for surge suppressers and RF receiver.

Page 6

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Accessories

Page Rev 1/2/19

Transformers
12, 16, 24 Volt AC & DC
11.13

4.50

283 mm

114 mm

6.00
152 mm

20 VA Transformers
1215-061 12-Volt AC Output
1804-059 24-Volt AC Output
1804-060 16-Volt AC Output

1200-080

Transformer Box
1200-080 ......................................................................234.00

40 VA Transformer
1508-060 16-Volt AC Output

DC Transformers - Regulated
1812-020 12-Volt 1000 mA
1812-136 24-Volt 1000 mA

20-VA Transformers
1215-061 12-VAC ........................................................... 45.16

•

Holds up to four (4) 20-VA transformers.

1804-059 24-VAC ........................................................... 52.38

•

Suitable for indoor or outdoor use.

1804-060 16-VAC ........................................................... 52.38

40-VA Transformers
1508-060 16-VAC ........................................................... 57.80

DC Transformers - Regulated
1812-020 12-VDC, 1000 mA ........................................... 51.62
1812-136 24-VDC, 1000 mA ........................................... 64.22

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 7

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Accessories

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Accessories
Timers / Surge Suppressers
6.00

6.00

3.88

2.37

1.25

152 MM

152 MM

99 MM

60 MM

32 MM

3.00

2.75

76 MM

1877-010

2.37

70 MM

1879-080

1878-010

60 MM

2600-791

Surge Suppressers

7-Day Timer

1877-010 Phone Line .................................................... 156.00

2600-791 ...................................................................... 254.00

1878-010 Low Voltage (24 VAC) ................................... 156.00

•

20 Programs.

1879-080 High Voltage (120 VAC)................................. 156.00

•

24 VAC.

•

Form C dry contact relay.

Page 8

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Section A5
This Price Schedule is effective January 7, 2019.

Advanced Replacement & Repair
Date

Page

1-2-19

All

Comment
January, 2019 Price Schedule update.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 1

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Page 2

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Table of Contents
Advance Replacement & Repair Policy................................................................................................................... 5
Telephone Entry System Main Circuit Board Reference Table ............................................................................... 6
Telephone Entry System Circuit Boards ................................................................................................................. 8
Telephone Entry System Circuit Board Upgrades ................................................................................................. 10
Access Control Products Circuit Board Reference Table ...................................................................................... 11
Access Control Systems Major Components ........................................................................................................ 12
Access Control Products Circuit Boards................................................................................................................ 13
Gate Operator Circuit Board Reference Table...................................................................................................... 14
Gate Operator Circuit Boards ............................................................................................................................... 16
Counter and Accessory Boards ............................................................................................................................. 17
Loop Detectors ..................................................................................................................................................... 18

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 3

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Page 4

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Circuit Board Advance Replacement and Repair Policy
Repair and Return
All repairs must be issued an RMA number before they can be returned to DoorKing. Repairs that are returned without prior authorization
are subject to lengthy delays. Prior to returning any item to DoorKing, please contact our RMA department for an RMA number and have
the following information available: the model number of the product and the circuit board number, the serial number, and the revision
letter.
Standard flat rate repair charges that are listed on the following pages apply only to products manufactured by DoorKing that are beyond
the warranty period and became defective because of random component failure. Standard flat rate repair charges apply only to products
that are returned to DoorKing for repair and return. The standard flat rate repair charge does not apply to products that are returned
under an advance replacement RMA.
The standard repair charges do not apply to products or parts that are deemed by DoorKing to be un-repairable because of vandalism,
abuse, improper installation including connection to an improper voltage source, power surges, lightning damage or natural disasters.
Additional repair charges will be assessed to replace missing parts or parts damaged beyond repair. Boards that are deemed to be beyond
repair will be returned to the owner or scrapped upon written authorization from the owner.

Advance Replacements
Defective or un-used parts that have been advanced to you must be returned to DoorKing within thirty (30) days from the date of the
advance replacement invoice.
Not all circuit boards are available for advance replacement. Advance replacement boards are not guaranteed to be available. You must
know the serial number and the revision level of the board that you are requesting an advance replacement for prior to our shipping an
advance replacement board to you.
Out of warranty advance replacement repair charges are billed at a higher rate than the standard flat rate repair and return charge.

Obsolete Board Repair and Replacement (Upgrade) Information
Many early model circuit boards are not available for advance replacement and cannot be repaired. These boards are identified in the
tables on the following pages.
Upgrade: The upgrade option allows you to replace an old circuit board with a new current production circuit board at a reduced rate.
When choosing this option, the upgrade charge includes any additional parts required to install the new circuit board into the telephone
entry / access control system. The upgrade option also carries a two-year warranty on the circuit board.
If you choose the upgrade option as an advance replacement, the reduced rate upgrade charge will not be applicable until the replaced
circuit board and memory chips are returned to DoorKing. Otherwise, you will be responsible for payment in full of the new circuit board
and memory chips sent to you under the advance replacement program.

Shipping Charges
DoorKing pays UPS ground shipping charges one way only on warranty advance replacement items. If any other means of shipping (UPS
red, blue, etc.) is requested, you are responsible for the difference between that method and UPS ground charges. Shipping charges for
the return of advance replacement items are the responsibility of the customer. All shipping charges for non-warranty repair items are the
responsibility of the customer.

Repair Warranty
Circuit boards repaired by DoorKing are warranted for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of repair. This warranty covers bench
repairs only. For this warranty to be in effect, any product or parts must be returned to DoorKing freight prepaid. DoorKing is not
responsible for any cost incurred involving on site service calls, or labor charges incurred in the removal or replacement of any parts. This
warranty does not apply to products or parts damaged because of vandalism, abuse, improper installation including connection to an
improper voltage source, power surges, lightning damage or natural disasters.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 5

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Telephone Entry System Circuit Boards
Circuit
Board
1800-009
1800-010
1801-010
1802-010
1804-010

Model(s)
Used On
1800-081
1800-080
1801-080
1802, 1804-1
1808, 1810-1
1803-2, 1804-2
1810-2

REV

Options Available
Advance

Replace

All

Yes

Yes

Yes

Cellular system circuit boards.

All

No

No

No

No upgrade available.

All

No

No

No

No upgrade available.

Upgrade
Schedule K

Use upgrade option.

1833-010

1833

D–R

No

No

1833-010

1833

S or Higher

Yes

Yes

1834-010

1834

D-Q

No

No

1834-010

1834

R or Higher

Yes

Yes

D-Q

No

No

R or Higher

Yes

Yes

1834-009
1834-009

1834 Wall Mount
Only
1834 Wall Mount
1834 90 Series

1835-010

1835

D–R

No

No

1835-010

1835

S or Higher

Yes

Yes

D–Q

No

No

R or Higher

Yes

Yes

1835-009
1835-009

1835 Wall Mount
Only
1835 Wall Mount
1835 90 Series

1837-010

1837

D–R

No

No

1837-010

1837

S or Higher

Yes

Yes

1840-010

1815

All

No

No

1841-010

1817

All

No

No

1842-010

1818

All

No

No

1843-010

1814

All

No

No

1844-010

1803 PC

All

No

No

1850-010

1814

A-I

No

No

1850-010

1814

1851-010

J–R

No

No

1814 P

All

No

No

1852-010

1815

All

No

No

1853-010

1817

All

No

No

1854-010

1818

All

No

No

1855-010

1815

All

No

No

1856-010

1817

All

No

No

1857-010

1818

All

No

No

1860-010

1802, 1803-1
1804-1, 1808
1810-1

All

No

No

Page 6

Notes

Repair

Upgrade K replaces board with the most current
level board revision.
Upgrade
Schedule K

Use upgrade option.

Upgrade
Schedule K

Use upgrade option.
Upgrade K replaces board with the most current
level board revision.

Upgrade
Schedule K

Use upgrade option.
Upgrade K replaces board with the most current
level board revision.

Upgrade
Schedule K

Use upgrade option.
Upgrade K replaces board with the most current
level board revision.

Upgrade
Schedule K

Use upgrade option.
Upgrade K replaces board with the most current
level board revision.

Upgrade
Schedule A

Use upgrade option.

No

No upgrade available.

Upgrade
Schedule C
Upgrade
Schedule D
Upgrade
Schedule I
No

Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.
No upgrade available.

Upgrade
Schedule D
Upgrade
Schedule D
Upgrade
Schedule A
Upgrade
Schedule B
Upgrade
Schedule C
Upgrade
Schedule A
Upgrade
Schedule B
Upgrade
Schedule C
Upgrade
Schedule E

Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.
No upgrade available.
Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.
No upgrade available.
Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Page Rev 1/2/19

Telephone Entry System Circuit Boards
Circuit
Board
1862-010
1862-010
1863-010
1863-010
1865-010

Model(s)
Used On
1802, 1803
1808, 1810
1802, 1803
1808, 1810
1802P, 1803P
1808P, 1810P
1802P, 1803P
1808P, 1810P
1803-2, 1804-2
1810-2

REV

Options Available
Repair

Advance

Replace

A-M

No

No

Upgrade
Schedule N

N or Higher

Yes

Yes

A-H

No

No

I or Higher

Yes

Yes

All

No

No

1870-010

1812

All

No

No

1871-010

1812

A–Z

No

No

1871-010

1812

AA - Higher

Yes

Yes

1880-010

1816

All

No

No

1885-010

1816 / 1820

H-R

No

No

1885-010

1816 / 1820

S - Higher

Yes

Yes

A–N
O - Higher
A –N
O - Higher

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

No
Yes
No
Yes

Upgrade
Schedule F
Upgrade
Schedule H
Upgrade
Schedule J

Notes
Use upgrade option.

Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.

No

1971-010

1812 Plus

1970-010

1802AP,1808AP, 1810AP,
1812AP, 1838AP

1597-010

1814-075

All

No

No

Yes

1598-010

All

All

No

No

Yes

1807-010

1803, 1804
1810

All

No

No

No

1875-010

1812

All

No

Yes

Yes

1881-010

1816

D-F

No

No

1816 decoder board.

1881-010

1816

G - Higher

Yes

Yes

1816 decoder board.

1882-010

1816

All

No

No

1884-010

1820

All

Yes

Yes

1820 Line Interface Board

1886-010

1820

All

Yes

Yes

1820 Power Supply Board

No

1890-010

1802, 1803, 1810

All

Yes

Yes

1896-010

1814

All

No

No

No
No

Secondary keypad board. Replace if faulty.
Secondary keypad interface board. Replace if
faulty.
Old style programming display. No replacement
available.
By-pass switch. Replace if faulty.

1816 relay board.

Programming display for 1862 board.
Old style small directory. No replacement available.

1897-010

All

All

No

No

1982-010

1816

All

Yes

Yes

1998-010

All

All

No

Yes

Yes

Microphone board. Replace if faulty.

1898-010

1803, 1804
1810

All

No

No

No

Vacuum fluorescent programming display. No
replacement available.

1899-010

1704, 1720, 1804

All

No

No

No

Fluorescent light kit ballast assembly.

A-C

No

No

Elevator control board.

D - Higher

Yes

Yes

Elevator control board.

All

No

No

Tracker expansion board - Obsolete

2348-010
2348-010
2351-010

1833, 1835
1837, 1838
1833, 1835
1837, 1838
1833, 1835
1837, 1838

Microphone board. Replace with 1998-010 if faulty.
1816 relay board

2354-010

RS-485 Devices

All

Yes

Yes

RS-485 Wiegand Interface Board

2358-010

1833, 1835 1837, 1838

All

Yes

Yes

Tracker expansion board

2360-010

1833, 1835
1837, 1838

All

Yes

Yes

Wireless baseboard

1489-010

2358-010

All

Yes

Yes

Wireless expansion board

All

Yes

Yes

Wireless repeater

2366-010

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 7

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Telephone Entry System Circuit Boards
1800 Series Boards
Code
Repair A

Description
1801-010 Repair and return only.

List
240.00

1830 Series Boards
Repair A
XCHG A

1833-010 Repair and return.
1833-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

1834-010 Repair and return.
1834-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

1834-009 Repair and return.
1834-009 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

1835-010 Repair and return.
1835-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

1835-009 Repair and return.
1835-009 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

1837-010 Repair and return.
1837-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

1838-010 Repair and return.
1838-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

1860 Series Boards
Repair A
XCHG A

1862-010 Repair and return.
1862-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

1863-010 Repair and return.
1863-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

1870 Series Boards
Repair A
XCHG A

1871-010 Repair and return.
1871-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

1880 Series Boards
Repair A

1881-010 Repair and return.

240.00

Repair D

1882-010 Repair and return.

140.00

Repair D
XCHG D

1884-010 Repair and return.
1884-010 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

Repair A
XCHG A

1885-010 Repair and return.
1885-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair D
XCHG D

1982-010 Repair and return.
1982-010 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

Page 8

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Page Rev 1/2/19

Telephone Entry System Miscellaneous Boards
1890 Series Boards
Code

Description

List

Repair E
XCHG E

1890-010 Repair and return.
1890-010 Advance replacement.

80.00
100.00

Repair E

1896-010 Repair and return only.

80.00

2300 Series Boards
Repair A
XCHG A

2348-010 Repair and return.
2348-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Miscellaneous Boards
Repair E

1807-010 Repair and return only.

80.00

XCHG G

1875-010 Replacement only.

95.00

XCHGKP01

1804-055, 1804-056, 1805-155, 1804-156 Replacement only.

121.50

XCHGKP02

1895-016, 1895-017 Replacement only.

104.00

Keypads

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 9

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Telephone Entry System Circuit Board Upgrades
1830 Series Upgrade
Code

Description

List

Upgrade M

1834 to 1835 Upgrade
Replaces 1834 circuit board with the 1835 circuit board. Memory chip included.

1300.00

Upgrade K

1833, 1834, 1835, 1837, 1838 Board Upgrade
Replaces older 1830 series circuit board with current 1830 series circuit board. Memory
chips (same size) included.

1300.00

1850 / 1840 Series Board Upgrades
Upgrade A

1852, 1855, 1840 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1852, 1855 or 1840 circuit board (1815 systems) with 1835 circuit board.
Software and memory chips (same size) included.

1300.00

Upgrade C

1854, 1857, 1842 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1854, 1857 or 1842 circuit board (1818 systems) with 1838 circuit board.
Software and memory chips (same size) included.

1300.00

Upgrade D

1850, 1851, 1843 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1850, 1851 or 1843 circuit board (1814 systems) with 1834 circuit board.
Software and memory chips (same size) included.

1300.00

Upgrade I

1844 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1844 circuit board (1803 PC systems) with 1833 circuit board. Software and
memory chips (same size) included.

1300.00

1860 Series Board Upgrades
Upgrade E

1860 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1860 circuit board with 1862 circuit board. Includes display & memory chips of
same size as those in board being upgraded.

670.00

Upgrade F

1865 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1865 circuit board with 1862 circuit board. Includes display, terminal strip &
memory chips of same size as those in board being upgraded.

638.00

Upgrade N

1862 Board Upgrade
Replaces older 1862 circuit board with current 1862 circuit board. Includes display,
terminal strip & memory chips of same size as those in board being upgraded.

670.00

1870 Series Board Upgrades
Upgrade H

1870 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1870 circuit board with 1871 circuit board. Includes 1812-075 conversion kit.

976.00

Upgrade J

1871 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1871 Rev A – Z circuit board with current 1871 circuit board.

866.00

1970 Series Board Upgrades
Upgrade J

1970 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1970 Rev A – K3 circuit board with current 1970 circuit board.

866.00

Upgrade J

1971 Board Upgrade
Replaces 1971 Rev A – K3 circuit board with current 1971 circuit board.

866.00

Page 10

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Page Rev 1/2/19

Access Control Products Circuit Boards
Circuit
Board

Model(s)
Used On

REV

Options Available
Repair

Advance

Replace

No

1515-009

Notes

Wiegand
Keypads

All

No

1500-010

1503, 1504

All

No

No

1515-010

New circuit board.

1502-010

1502, 1504

All

No

No

1515-010

New circuit board.

1515-010

New circuit board.

1500-009

New circuit board.

1503-010

1503, 1504

All

No

No

1505-009

1520

A-D

No

No

1505-009

1520

E – Higher

Yes

Yes

1506-010

1506, 1504

A–K

No

No

1506-010

1506, 1504

L – Higher

Yes

Yes

1508-010

1508

All

No

No

1513-010

1513

A–D

Yes

No

1513-010

1513

E – Higher

Yes

Yes

1515-009

Wiegand
Keypads

All

Yes

Yes

1515-010

1515

All

Yes

Yes

1587-010

Printer Interface

All

No

No

Yes

1588-010

1508

All

No

No

No

1589-010

1508

All

No

No

No

1596-010

1507, 1514

All

No

No

No

1597-010

Secondary
Keypad Interface

All

No

No

Yes

Replace if faulty.

1599-010

1506, 1504

F - Higher

No

No

Yes

Replace if faulty.

No

No

Yes

Upgrade
Schedule K
Upgrade
Schedule K
Upgrade
Schedule C
Upgrade
Schedule C
Upgrade
Schedule C

Replace if faulty.

1838-010

1838

A–Q

No

No

1838-010

1838

R or Higher

Yes

Yes

1842-010

1818

All

No

No

1854-010

1818

All

No

No

1857-010

1818

All

No

No

2348-010

Elevator Control

A-C

Yes

No

Yes

2348-010

Elevator Control

D – Higher

Yes

Yes

Yes

2351-010

Tracker
Expansion

All

No

No

Yes

2354-010

RS-485 Devices

E-F

Yes

No

RS-485 Wiegand Interface Board

2354-010

RS-485 Devices

G - Higher

Yes

Yes

RS-485 Wiegand Interface Board

2358-010

Tracker
Expansion

All

Yes

Yes

8040-080

8040

All

Yes

Yes

8054-xxx

8054

All

Yes

8055-xxx

8055

All

Yes

8056-xxx

8056

All

No

8057-xxx

8057

All

Yes

8059-xxx

8059

All

No

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Use upgrade option.
Upgrade K replaces board with the most current
level board revision.
Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.
Use upgrade option.

Replace with 2358-010 tracker board

Yes
Yes
No

Replace with 8040 receiver
Yes

No

Replace with 8040 receiver

Page 11

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Access Systems Major Components
Circuit
Board
1894-040
1812-145
1812-147

Page 12

Model(s)
Used On
Color CCTV
Camera
Color CCTV
Camera
Color CCTV
Camera

REV

Options Available
Repair

Advance

All

Yes

All

Yes

All

Yes

Replace

Notes

Cameras are sent to the vendor for warranty repair /
replacement.

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Page Rev 1/2/19

Access Control System Circuit Boards
1500 Series Boards
Code

Description

List

Repair D
XCHG D

1515-010 Repair and return.
1515-010 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

Repair D
XCHG D

1506-010 Repair and return.
1506-010 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

Repair D
XCHG D

1513-010 Repair and return.
1513-010 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

Repair D
XCHG D

1505-009 Repair and return.
1505-009 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

1800 Series Boards
Repair A
XCHG A

1838-010 Repair and return.
1838-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

2300 Series Boards
Repair A
XCHG A

2348-010 Repair and return.
2348-010 Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair D
XCHG D

2354-010 Repair and return.
2354-010 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

Repair D
XCHG D

2358-010 Repair and return.
2358-010 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 13

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Gate Operator Circuit Boards

Circuit
Board

Model(s)
Used On

1473-010

Pre-2016
operators only

1601-010

1601

1601-010

1601, 1602

2340-010

1601, 1602, 1603,
6100, 6300, 9150,
9300, 9310

REV

Options Available
Repair

Advance

All

Yes

Yes

D-Y

No

No

Z - AH Higher

Yes

Yes

All

No

No

Notes

Replace

Replaces 2340 circuit board. Use Kit P/N 1473-121.
Yes

Replace with current production board.

Replace with 1473-121 board kit.

2355-010

1000

A-J

No

No

2355-010

1000

K - Higher

Yes

Yes

Yes

Model 1000 Inverter circuit board.

4001-010

240, 480, 600, 800,
1000

All

No

No

Yes

Replace with new 4502-009 board.

4100-010

6524, 9024

AA - AF

Yes

Yes

Replace with 4100-018.

4100-012

6524, 9024

H-O

Yes

Yes

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

4100-018

6524, 9024

All

Yes

Yes

4201-010

605, 805 mfg. prior
to 6/93

All

No

No

AA - AC

Yes

Yes

Replace with 4302-018

D-M

No

No

Use with pre 2016 models only.

N or
Higher

Yes

Yes

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

4302-010
4302-012
4302-012

6002, 6003, 6004,
6400
6002, 6003, 6004,
6005, 6400
6002, 6003, 6004,
6005, 6400

Replace with current production board.

Yes

Replace with new 4502-009 board (requires 4001020 terminal strip and rewire).

4302-018

6003, 6004, 6005,
6400

All

Yes

Yes

4402-012

1150, 9200, 9300

B-H

No

No

4402-012

1150, 9200, 9300

I or Higher

Yes

Yes

Use with pre 2016 models only.

4403-012

9310

C-N

No

No

Use with pre 2016 models only.

4403-012

9310

M or
Higher

Yes

Yes

Use with pre 2016 models only.

4404-010

9210, 9220 9230,
9235, 9240, 9530
9550, 9555, 9575

AA - AB

Yes

Yes

Replace with 4404-018.

4404-012

4404-012

4404-018
4405-010
4405-012
4405-012
4405-018

Page 14

Yes
Use with pre 2016 models only.

9210, 9220 9230,
9235, 9240, 9530
9550, 9555, 9575
9210, 9220 9230,
9235, 9240, 9530
9550, 9555, 9575
9210, 9220 9230,
9235, 9240, 9530
9550, 9555, 9575

B-E

No

No

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

F or
Higher

Yes

Yes

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

All

Yes

Yes

6500, 6550, 9000

AA - AB

Yes

Yes

Replace with 4405-018.

A-F

No

NO

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

G - Higher

Yes

Yes

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

All

Yes

Yes

1175, 6500, 6550,
9000
1175, 6500, 6550,
9000
1175, 6500, 6550,
9000

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Page Rev 1/2/19

Gate Operator Circuit Boards

Circuit
Board
4501-010

4502-009

Model(s)
Used On
240, 480, 600,
601, 602, 605,610,
615, 620, 625, 805,
810, 815
240, 480, 600,
601, 602, 605,610,
615, 620, 625, 805,
810, 815

REV

Options Available
Repair

Advance

All

No

No

N - Higher

Yes

Yes

Replace

Notes

Replace with 4502-009.

4502-010

6050, 6100, 6300

AA - AC

Yes

Yes

Replace with 4502-018.

4502-012

6050, 6100, 6300

A-J

No

No

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

4502-012

6050, 6100, 6300

K or
Higher

Yes

Yes

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

4502-018

6050, 6100, 6300

All

Yes

Yes

All

No

No

S - Higher

Yes

Yes

4601-010
4602-009

910, 915, 920,
1100
910, 915, 920,
1100

Replace with 4602-009.

4602-010

9100, 9150

AA - AB

Yes

Yes

Replace with 4602-018.

4602-012

9100, 9150

A-Q

No

No

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

4602-012

9100, 9150

R or
Higher

Yes

Yes

Use with Pre 2016 models only.

4602-018

9100, 9150

All

Yes

Yes

4701-010

905, 907

All

No

No

4702-009

905, 907

J - Higher

Yes

Yes

4702-010

9050, 9070

AA - AB

Yes

Yes

Replace with 4702-018.

4702-012

9050, 9070

A-H

No

No

Use with pre 2016 models only.

4702-012

9050, 9070

I or Higher

Yes

Yes

Use with pre 2016 models only.

4702-018

9050

All

Yes

Yes

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Replace with 4702-009.

Page 15

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Gate Operator Circuit Boards
Swing Gate Operators
Code

Description

List

Repair A
XCHG A

4302 All boards - Repair and return.
4302 All boards - Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

4405 All boards - Repair and return.
4405 All boards - Advance replacement (Rev M and higher only).

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

4502 All boards - Repair and return.
4502 All boards - Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Slide Gate Operators
Repair A
XCHG A

4402 All boards - Repair and return.
4402 All boards - Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

4403 All boards - Repair and return.
4403 All boards - Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

4404 All boards - Repair and return.
4404 All boards - Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

4602 All boards - Repair and return.
4602 All boards - Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

4702 All boards - Repair and return.
4702 All boards - Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Barrier and Overhead Gate Operators
Repair A
XCHG A

1601 All boards - Repair and return.
1601 All boards - Advance replacement (Rev W and higher only).

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

4402 All boards (1150 operator) - Repair and return.
4402 All boards (1150 operator) - Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Repair A
XCHG A

4405 All boards (1175 operator) - Repair and return.
4405 All boards (1175 operator) - Advance replacement.

240.00
320.00

Power Inverter / Backup
Repair D
XCHG D

Page 16

2355-010 Repair and return.
2355-010 Advance replacement (Rev W and higher only).

140.00
180.00

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

Page Rev 1/2/19

Counter and Accessory Boards
Magnetic Counter Boards
Repair E
XCHG E

3003-010 Repair and return.
3003-010 Advance replacement.

80.00
100.00

Repair E
XCHG E

3003-012 Repair and return.
3003-012 Advance replacement.

80.00
100.00

Repair E
XCHG E

3003-013 Repair and return.
3003-013 Advance replacement.

80.00
100.00

Repair E
XCHG E

3003-014 Repair and return.
3003-014 Advance replacement.

80.00
100.00

Repair E
XCHG E

3003-015 Repair and return.
3003-015 Advance replacement.

80.00
100.00

Counter Probe
XCHG B

3004-010 Replacement only.

148.00

Accessory Boards
Repair D
XCHG D

1473-010 Repair and return.
1473-010 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

Repair D
XCHG D

2355-010 Repair and return.
2355-010 Advance replacement.

140.00
180.00

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 17

PRICE SCHEDULE A 2.0
Advanced Replacement & Repair

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Loop Detectors

Circuit
Board

Model(s)
Used On

REV

Options Available
Repair

Advance

9409-010

Loop Detector

A-G

No

No

9409-010

Loop Detector

H - Higher

Yes

Yes

9410-010

Loop Detector

A-G

No

No

9410-010

Loop Detector

H - Higher

Yes

Yes

9411-010

Loop Detector

All

Yes

Yes

Notes

Replace
Replace detector.

Replace detector.

Loop Detector Boards
Code

Description

List

Repair E
XCHG E

9409-010 Repair and return.
9409-010 Advance replacement.

80.00
100.00

Repair E
XCHG E

9410-010 Repair and return.
9410-010 Advance replacement.

80.00
100.00

Page 18

Prices and specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Section B1
This Price Schedule is effective January 7, 2019.

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators
Date

Page

1-2-19

All

Comment
January, 2019 Price Schedule update.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 1

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019

Maximum Security Operators

9200 and 9500 series operators are designed to operate vehicular sliding gates used in Limited (Class III) and Restricted
(Class IV) industrial and maximum security applications only. These operators must never be used in Residential (Class I) or
Commercial (Class II) applications, or in any application where the gate is operated by the General Public.
These operators must be installed with external entrapment prevention devices, Type B1 (non-contact) or Type B2
(contact), or a combination of both to insure all entrapment hazard areas are protected. Refer to the Installation Manual
for important safety information.

Minimum Gate Length

Most 9200 and 9500 Series operators have variable speed capability which allows the user to adjust the speed of the gate.
On most operators, the speed can be set for speeds up to 2 Ft/sec., and on certain models the gate speed can be set up to
4 Ft/sec. When using these higher speeds, there is a time factor to consider during the start-up and the slow-down of the
gate. For this reason, you will see a minimum gate length on operators design to move a gate at the higher speeds.

Page 2

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

UL 325 – August 2018 Update
Requirements mandated by the safety standard (UL 325) that DKS gate operators are listed to require that photo-beams
and contact edges used for entrapment protection must be monitored. Entrapment protection must be provided for the
gate system where the risk of entrapment exist. The gate operator will not run without one or more external entrapment
protection devices installed in each direction of travel. Check the gate operator installation manual for a list of external
entrapment protection devices that can be used with DKS gate operator products.
The August, 2018 update to the safety standard requires that a minimum of two independent means of entrapment
protection must be provided, in each direction of travel, where the risk of entrapment exists. The inherent system in DKS
gate operators is active in both directions of travel, so this qualifies as one means of entrapment protection in each
direction. The second means will be an external device (a non-contact or a contact sensor) as required in each direction.
The actual number of external devices required is dependent on the gate system layout and the number of entrapment
areas that will need to be protected. Installers will have to identify all potential areas where the risk of entrapment exist
and how best to protect those areas. For example, some gates may require two (or more) external devices in each
direction of travel to protect all potential areas of entrapment.
There is an exception for swing gates and vertical lift gates regarding the minimum of two entrapment protection devices
in each direction of travel. For example, if on a swing gate system there is no potential for entrapment in the opening
direction, then only the close direction will require a minimum of two means of entrapment protection. Installers will have
to determine if any entrapment hazards exist in the opening direction, and if so, then those areas will have to be protected
with external devices.
Vertical lift gates require two means of entrapment protection in the down cycle, but will only require one means of
entrapment protection in the up cycle. The model 1175 is considered to be a vertical lift gate operator for entrapment
protection means requirements.
Barrier gate operators that are installed in such a way that the barrier arm does not come closer than 16 inches to a rigid
object are not required to protect against entrapment.
The table below shows the minimum entrapment protection requirements for each type of gate operator in the scope of
the UL 325 Standard for Safety.

Opening

Closing

Horizontal Slide Gate

2

2

Horizontal Swing Gate

2*

2*

Vertical Pivot Gate

2

2

Vertical Lift gate

1

2

* For a horizontal swing gate operator, at least two independent entrapment protection means are required in each
direction of travel. Except, if there is no entrapment zone in one direction of travel, only one means of entrapment
protection is required in that direction of travel; however, the other direction must have two independent entrapment
protection means.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 3

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

Blank Page

Page 4

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Table of Contents
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators
Model 9210 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Model 9220 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Model 9230 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Model 9235 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10
Model 9240 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 12

Heavy-Duty Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators
Model 9530 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 14
Model 9550 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 16
Model 9555 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 18
Model 9575 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 20

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 5

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9210 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

9210
•

Adjustable Limits

•

40:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Fixed Speed

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

20-Feet (6m) #50 / #60 Chain

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

16.00

16.00

406 mm

406 mm

35.50

31.25

12.00

18.00

120.00

4.00

794 mm

305 mm

457 mm

3048 mm

102 mm

902 mm

2601-270

Model

Chain

#50
9210
#60

Speed
Fixed

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Minimum
Gate Length

Mount

100 Ft

10 Ft

Pad or
Pedestal3

Class of
Operation1

Voltage
VAC

III, IV

115, 208,
230, 460

HP

Power
Outlets

Loop
Ports2

1

2

2

2000 Lbs3
1 Ft/sec
.3m/sec

907 Kg

3000 Lbs3

30m

3m

1360 Kg

1.

III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

3.

Requires 9200-135 pedestal.

Page 6

1.75
44 mm

Not to Scale

9200-135

9210 - xxx

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

9210 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

Operators w/#50 Chain

Accessories

9210-380 1 HP, 115V (9.7A) ....................................... 4890.00

9200-135 Mounting Pedestal ....................................... 894.00

9210-382 1 HP, 208V 1° (5.0A) ................................... 4942.50

2601-270 Chain Tray Kit 10 Ft (3m)1 ............................. 399.00

9210-384 1 HP, 230V 1° (4.9A) ................................... 4942.50

1601-195 Heater Kit 120 VAC2...................................... 759.00

9210-386 1 HP, 208V 3° (3.4A) ................................... 5160.00

1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC2 .............................. Note 3

9210-388 1 HP, 230V 3° (3.3A) ................................... 5160.00

1601-198 Heater Kit 480 VAC2...................................... Note 3

9210-390 1 HP, 460V 3° (1.7A) ................................... 5160.00

1. 9200-135 required if chain tray is used.
2. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Operators w/#60 Chain
9210-381 1 HP, 115V (9.7A) ....................................... 4965.00
9210-383 1 HP, 208V 1° (5.0A) ................................... 5025.00

3. See Section A1, page 31 for pricing.

Chain

9210-385 1 HP, 230V 1° (4.9A) ................................... 5025.00

2600-485 #50 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 165.00

9210-387 1 HP, 208V 3° (3.4A) ................................... 5242.50

2600-448 #60 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 264.00

9210-389 1 HP, 230V 3° (3.3A) ................................... 5242.50
9210-391 1 HP, 460V 3° (1.7A) ................................... 5242.50
Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see Section A1, pages 42-43.
Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Loops and Loop Detectors
See section A1, page 44 for a complete list of all loop detectors,
prefabricated loops and loop accessories available.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 7

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9220 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

9220
•

Adjustable Limits

•

40:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Variable Speed

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

20-Feet (6m) #60 Chain

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

16.00

16.00

406 mm

406 mm

35.50

31.25

12.00

18.00

120.00

4.00

794 mm

305 mm

457 mm

3048 mm

102 mm

902 mm

2601-270

Model

Chain

9220

#60

1.

Speed
Variable

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Minimum
Gate Length

Mount

1-2 Ft/sec

2000 Lbs3

100 Ft

20 Ft

Pad or
Pedestal3

.3-.6m/sec

907 Kg

30m

6m

Class of
Operation1

Voltage
VAC

III, IV

208, 230,
460

HP

Power
Outlets

Loop
Ports2

2

2

2

III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

3.

Requires 9200-135 pedestal.

Page 8

1.75
44 mm

Not to Scale

9200-135

9220 - xxx

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

9220 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

Operators w/#60 Chain

Accessories

9220-381 2 HP, 208V 1° (11.7A) ................................. 6052.50

9200-135 Mounting Pedestal ....................................... 894.00

9220-383 2 HP, 230V 1° (11.5A) ................................. 6052.50

2601-270 Chain Tray Kit 10 Ft (3m)1 ............................. 399.00

9220-385 2 HP, 208V 3° (6.6A) ................................... 6270.00

1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC2 .............................. Note 3

9220-387 2 HP, 230V 3° (6.2A) ................................... 6270.00

1601-198 Heater Kit 480 VAC2...................................... Note 3

9220-389 2 HP, 460V 3° (3.1A) ................................... 6270.00

1. 9200-135 required if chain tray is used.
2. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see Section A1, pages 42-43.
Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

3. See Section A1, page 31 for pricing.

Chain
2600-448 #60 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 264.00

Loops and Loop Detectors
See section A1, page 44 for a complete list of all loop detectors,
prefabricated loops and loop accessories available.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 9

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9230 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

9230
•

Adjustable Limits

•

40:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Variable Speed

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

20-Feet (6m) #60 Chain

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

16.00

16.00

406 mm

406 mm

47.00

120.00

4.00

3048 mm

102 mm

1206 mm

2601-270

12.00

1.75

305 mm

44 mm

Not to Scale

16.25

31.25
794 mm

413 mm

9230-xxx

Model

Chain

9230

#60

Speed
Variable

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Minimum
Gate Length

1-2 Ft/sec

5000 Lbs3

100 Ft

20 Ft

.3-.6m/sec

2267 Kg

30m

6m

Mount

Class of
Operation1

Voltage
VAC

HP

Power
Outlets

Loop
Ports2

Pedestal3

III, IV

208, 230

3

2

2

1.

III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

3.

9200-135 pedestal included.

Page 10

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

9230 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

Operators w/#60 Chain

Accessories

9230-380 3 HP, 208V 3° (9.8A) ................................... 8730.00

2601-270 Chain Tray Kit 10 Ft (3m) .............................. 399.00

9230-381 3 HP, 230V 3° (9.6A) ................................... 8730.00

1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC1 .............................. Note 2
1. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see Section A1, pages 42-43.
Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

2. See Section A1, page 31 for pricing.

Chain
2600-448 #60 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 264.00

Loops and Loop Detectors
See section A1, page 44 for a complete list of all loop detectors,
prefabricated loops and loop accessories available.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 11

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9235 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

9235
•

Adjustable Limits

•

40:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Variable Speed

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

20-Feet (6m) #60 Chain

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

16.00

16.00

406 mm

406 mm

47.00

120.00

4.00

3048 mm

102 mm

1206 mm

2601-270

12.00

1.75

305 mm

44 mm

Not to Scale

16.25

31.25
794 mm

413 mm

9235-xxx

Model

Chain

9235

#60

Speed
Variable

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Minimum
Gate Length

1-4 Ft/sec

3000 Lbs3

100 Ft

30 Ft

.3-1.2m/sec

1360 Kg

30m

9m

Mount

Class of
Operation1

Voltage
VAC

HP

Power
Outlets

Loop
Ports2

Pedestal3

III, IV

208, 230

3

2

2

1.

III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

3.

9200-135 pedestal included.

Page 12

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

9235 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

Operators w/#60 Chain

Accessories

9235-380 3 HP, 208V 3° (12.8A) .............................. 13,005.00

2601-270 Chain Tray Kit 10 Ft (3m) .............................. 399.00

9235-381 3 HP, 230V 3° (12.6A) .............................. 13,005.00

1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC1 .............................. Note 2
1. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see Section A1, pages 42-43.
Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

2. See Section A1, page 31 for pricing.

Chain
2600-448 #60 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 264.00

Loops and Loop Detectors
See section A1, page 44 for a complete list of all loop detectors,
prefabricated loops and loop accessories available.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 13

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9240 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

9240
•

Adjustable Limits

•

40:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Variable Speed

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

20-Feet (6m) #80 Chain

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

16.00

16.00

406 mm

406 mm

47.00

120.00

4.00

3048 mm

102 mm

1206 mm

2601-270

12.00

1.75

305 mm

44 mm

Not to Scale

31.25

16.25

794 mm

413 mm

9240-xxx

Model

Chain

9240

#80

1.

Speed
Variable

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Minimum
Gate Length

1-2 Ft/sec

8000 Lbs3

100 Ft

25 Ft

.3-.6m/sec

3628 Kg

30m

7.6m

Mount

Class of
Operation1

Voltage
VAC

HP

Power
Outlets

Loop
Ports2

Pedestal3

III, IV

208, 230

3

2

2

III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

3.

9200-135 pedestal included.

Page 14

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

9240 Slide Gate Operator

Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

Operators w/#80 Chain

Accessories

9240-380 3 HP, 208V 3° (9.8A) ................................ 13,005.00

2601-270 Chain Tray Kit 10 Ft (3m) .............................. 399.00

9240-381 3 HP, 230V 3° (9.6A) ................................ 13,005.00

1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC1 .............................. Note 2
1. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see Section A1, pages 42-43.
Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

2. See Section A1, page 31 for pricing.

Chain
2601-268 #80 Chain, 10-Ft (3 m) .................................. 249.00
2601-269 #80 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 501.00

Loops and Loop Detectors
See section A1, page 44 for a complete list of all loop detectors,
prefabricated loops and loop accessories available.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 15

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9530 Slide Gate Operator

Heavy-Duty Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

9530
•

Adjustable Limits

•

40:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Variable Speed

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

20-Feet (6m) #80 Chain

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

54.00

26.00

49.00

22.50

1372 mm

660 mm

1245 mm

572 mm

62.00

59.00

1575 mm

1499 mm

95xx-xxx with Standard Polyurethane housing

Model

Chain

9530

#80

95xx-xxx with optional 10ga. Steel housing

Speed
Variable

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Minimum
Gate Length

1-2 Ft/sec

8000 Lbs3

160 Ft

25 Ft

.3-.6m/sec

3628 Kg

48m

7.6m

Mount

Class of
Operation1

Voltage
VAC

Pad

III, IV

208, 230,
460

1.

III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

Page 16

HP

Power
Outlets

Loop
Ports2

3

2

2

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

9530 Slide Gate Operator

Heavy-Duty Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

Operators w/#80 Chain

Accessories

9530-380 3 HP, 208V 3° (9.8A) ................................ 14,595.00

2601-270 Chain Tray Kit 10 Ft (3m) .............................. 399.00

9530-381 3 HP, 230V 3° (9.6A) ................................ 14,595.00

1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC1 .............................. Note 2

9530-382 3 HP, 460V 3° (4.8A) ................................ 14,595.00

1601-198 Heater Kit 480 VAC1...................................... Note 2
9550-205 10 Ga. Steel Housing3 ................................. 4095.00

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see Section A1, pages 42-43.

1. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).
2. See Section A1, page 31 for pricing.
3. Special order. Contact the factory for lead time.

Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Chain

Loops and Loop Detectors

2601-269 #80 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 501.00

2601-268 #80 Chain, 10-Ft (3 m) .................................. 249.00
See section A1, page 44 for a complete list of all loop detectors,
prefabricated loops and loop accessories available.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 17

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9550 Slide Gate Operator

Heavy-Duty Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

9550
•

Adjustable Limits

•

40:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Variable Speed

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

20-Feet (6m) #100 Chain

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

54.00

26.00

49.00

22.50

1372 mm

660 mm

1245 mm

572 mm

62.00

59.00

1575 mm

1499 mm

95xx-xxx with Standard Polyurethane housing

Model

Chain

9550

#100

95xx-xxx with optional 10ga. Steel housing

Speed
Variable

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Minimum
Gate Length

.5-1 Ft/sec

15,000 Lbs3

160 Ft

25 Ft

.15-.3m/sec

6803 Kg

48m

7.6m

Mount

Class of
Operation1

Voltage
VAC

Pad

III, IV

208, 230,
460

1.

III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

Page 18

HP

Power
Outlets

Loop
Ports2

5

2

2

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

9550 Slide Gate Operator

Heavy-Duty Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

Operators w/#100 Chain

Accessories

9550-380 5 HP, 208V 3° (12.9A) .............................. 25,215.00

2601-270 Chain Tray Kit 10 Ft (3m) .............................. 399.00

9550-381 5 HP, 230V 3° (12.8A) .............................. 25,215.00

1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC1 .............................. Note 2

9550-382 5 HP, 460V 3° (6.4A) ................................ 25,215.00

1601-198 Heater Kit 480 VAC1...................................... Note 2
9550-205 10 Ga. Steel Housing3 ................................. 4095.00

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see Section A1, pages 42-43.
Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

1. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).
2. See Section A1, page 31 for pricing.
3. Special order. Contact the factory for lead time.

Chain
2601-272 #100 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) ................................ 543.00

Loops and Loop Detectors
See section A1, page 44 for a complete list of all loop detectors,
prefabricated loops and loop accessories available.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 19

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9555 Slide Gate Operator

Heavy-Duty Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

9555
•

Adjustable Limits

•

40:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Variable Speed

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

20-Feet (6m) #80 Chain

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

54.00

26.00

49.00

22.50

1372 mm

660 mm

1245 mm

572 mm

62.00

59.00

1575 mm

1499 mm

95xx-xxx with Standard Polyurethane housing

Model

Chain

9555

#80

95xx-xxx with optional 10ga. Steel housing

Speed
Variable

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Minimum
Gate Length

1-2 Ft/sec

10,000 Lbs3

160 Ft

25 Ft

.3-.6m/sec

4535 Kg

48m

7.6m

Mount

Class of
Operation1

Voltage
VAC

HP

Power
Outlets

Loop
Ports2

Pad

III, IV

208, 460

5

2

2

1.

III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

Page 20

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

9555 Slide Gate Operator

Heavy-Duty Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

Operators w/#80 Chain

Accessories

9555-380 5 HP, 208V 3° (12.9A) .............................. 20,835.00

2601-270 Chain Tray Kit 10 Ft (3m) .............................. 399.00

9555-382 5 HP, 460V 3° (6.4A) ................................ 20,835.00

1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC1 .............................. Note 2
1601-198 Heater Kit 480 VAC1...................................... Note 2

These operators include a mechanical disc braking system. A
brake auto-release can be factory ordered with this operator.

9550-205 10 Ga. Steel Housing3 ................................. 4095.00
1. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).
2. See Section A1, page 31 for pricing.

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices

3. Special order. Contact the factory for lead time.

Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see Section A1, pages 42-43.

Chain

Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

2601-268 #80 Chain, 10-Ft (3 m) .................................. 249.00
2601-269 #80 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) .................................. 501.00

Loops and Loop Detectors
See section A1, page 44 for a complete list of all loop detectors,
prefabricated loops and loop accessories available.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 21

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019
Page Rev 1/2/19

9575 Slide Gate Operator

Heavy-Duty Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

9575
•

Adjustable Limits

•

40:1 Gear Reducer Drive Train

•

Plug-in Loop Detector Ports

•

Variable Speed

•

Built-in power and reset switches

•

20-Feet (6m) #100 Chain

•

Two 115 VAC convenience outlets

•

Gate tracker data output

•

Partial open / anti-tailgate feature

•

Selectable stop/ reverse function

54.00

26.00

49.00

22.50

1372 mm

660 mm

1245 mm

572 mm

62.00

59.00

1575 mm

1499 mm

95xx-xxx with Standard Polyurethane housing

Model

Chain

9575

#100

95xx-xxx with optional 10ga. Steel housing

Speed
Variable

Maximum
Gate Weight

Maximum
Gate Length

Minimum
Gate Length

1-2 Ft/sec

25,000 Lbs3

160 Ft

25 Ft

.3-.6m/sec

11,339 Kg

48m

7.6m

Mount

Class of
Operation1

Voltage
VAC

HP

Power
Outlets

Loop
Ports2

Pad

III, IV

208

7.5

2

2

1.

III = Limited Access; IV = Restricted Access

2.

Plug-in loop detector ports; open and reverse. DoorKing plug-in loop detectors only.

Page 22

Specifications subject to change without notice.

January 2019

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

Page Rev 1/2/19

9575 Slide Gate Operator

Heavy-Duty Maximum Security Slide Gate Operator

Operators w/#100 Chain

Accessories

9575-380 7.5 HP, 208V 3° (22.6A) ........................... 32,850.00

2601-270 Chain Tray Kit 10 Ft (3m) .............................. 399.00
1601-197 Heater Kit 208/230 VAC1 .............................. Note 2

Choose Entrapment Protection (required) Devices
Use Type B1 (non-contact) and/or Type B2 (contact) entrapment
protection devices to protect all areas where the risk of entrapment
exist - see Section A1, pages 42-43.

9550-205 10 Ga. Steel Housing3 ................................. 4095.00
1. Use if temperature routinely falls below 10°F (-12°C).
2. See Section A1, page 31 for pricing.
3. Special order. Contact the factory for lead time.

Operator will not run without entrapment protection device(s)
connected to the controller board.

Chain
Loops and Loop Detectors

2601-272 #100 Chain, 20-Ft (6 m) ................................ 543.00

See section A1, page 44 for a complete list of all loop detectors,
prefabricated loops and loop accessories available.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Page 23

PRICE SCHEDULE B 1.5
Maximum Security Slide Gate Operators

January 2019

Blank Page

Page 24

Specifications subject to change without notice.

DKS® (DoorKing®) Connection Options Fee Schedule
Programming your DKS telephone entry / access control system using legacy modem-to-modem connections (a modem and phone line at
your PC) is becoming difficult to maintain. Modems are essentially obsolete and their performance is affected by the type of telephone
service at your PC. There are also many variable factors that can affect the modem, including the brand and model of the programming PC,
which OS version is in use, is the modem connected directly to the PC or through a USB Hub, brand and chipset versions of the modem and
modem driver updates. Existing modem-to-modem connections may become unreliable as telephone providers update their systems and
infrastructure and as your PC performs updates. These factors are beyond the control of DoorKing.
Beginning January 1, 2017 DoorKing will no longer offer technical support for communication failures between a PC modem and the DKS
entry system modem. If the modem connection is found to be functional at the DKS entry system and DoorKing tech support personnel
can connect to it via the DKS IM Server connection service, then this will be the recommended corrective action. Alternately,
troubleshooting the PC modem will be the responsibility of the owner and their IT (Information Technology) personnel.
Because of these reasons, DoorKing offers a variety of connection options for our telephone entry and access control systems. These
options offer a simple plug & play method to program your entry system via an internet or cellular connection and we also offer options for
voice communications as well. The type of service you choose should be based on your particular needs, the application that the system is
installed in and overall costs associated with these options. In many cases, you will find that the DoorKing options are less costly than
legacy options such as a POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) business line, VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) service providers or the time
and cost of IT (Information Technology) personnel setting up routers, firewalls, port forwarding, DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System)
charges or static IP addresses.

DKS Cellular OptionTM
DKS Cellular is a wireless option that replaces standard telephone lines and internet connections and offers voice communication and/or
data (programming) to the DKS telephone entry / access control system via the AT&T 4G LTE cellular network (where available). DKS
Cellular is available in all states including Alaska and Hawaii and is also available in Puerto Rico, all U.S. territories, Canada and Mexico. This
is a monthly cellular subscription service without any long term contracts. DKS Cellular plans include all taxes, fees and charges for voice
and data communication, including long distance charges.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Plug & Play installation. Requires DKS cellular adapter: 1800-080 for 1830 series; 1800-081 for Access Plus series; 1801-080 for
1800 series.
Monthly fees range from $39.95 to $75.95 depending on minutes and/or data used, so your monthly fees may vary from month
to month. In many cases, DKS cellular fees will be less than POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) line charges.
No phone lines or internet connection cables to run – no trenching or conduits to install.
No obsolete slow modems – entry systems program much faster.
Cellular offers crystal clear sound – no hums or buzzes.
Cellular is practically immune to power surges and lightning damage.
Use Voice + Data with PC programmable 1830 Series and Access Plus systems. Use Voice only with 1800 Series systems. Use
Data only with 1838 Series access controllers.

DKS Cellular1
Voice + Data
Voice
Minutes/Month
Up to 100
101 - 450
451 - 1200
1201 - 2500
2500 +

Monthly Fee
Data
Transfers/Month
Up to 6
7 - 60
61 - 90
91 - 120
121 +

39.95
49.95
59.95
69.95
75.95

Voice Only2
Voice
Minutes/Month
Up to 100
101 - 450
451 - 1200
1201 - 2500
2500 +

Monthly Fee

34.95
41.95
49.95
57.95
64.95

Data Only

Monthly Fee

Data
Transfers/Month
Up to 60
61 - 120
121 +

28.95
38.95
48.95

1. DKS Cellular is provided by AT&T 4G-LTE (where available). $45.00 one-time activation fee applies.
2. Voice only cellular option will not support modem communication.

PRICE SCHEDULE C 1.0
DKS Connection Option Fee Schedule

Rev 1-19

DKS VoIP and Data Options

DKS VoIP and Data services allow you to replace POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) lines with your internet connection and offers voice
communication and/or data (programming) to the DKS telephone entry / access control system. This is a flat rate monthly subscription
service without any long term contracts and includes all taxes, fees and charges for voice and/or data communication.
•
•
•
•
•

Plug & Play installation. Requires DKS 1830-186 TCP/IP adapter for programming. DKS 1815-568 VoIP adapter required for voice
service. As an option, use the DKS 1830-185 TCP/IP1 adapter and your own VoIP3 provider.
Data + VoIP combination simplifies installation. Requires DKS 2334-080 with VoIP + Data subscription.
Flat rate monthly fee: voice and data $23.952, voice only $19.952; data only $4.95.
Requires a network (internet) connection at the system – distance limitations on network wiring do apply.
You can use your own VoIP service3 and the DKS Data only option for programming.

1. There is a no fee option that will allow you to connect to the entry system via the internet without using DKS data services. This adapter requires manual configuration and fees
or charges may be incurred for a static IP address or DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System) host service. You will also need to use your own VoIP service for communication.
2. VoIP service provided by DKS.
3. If you use your own VoIP service, you will responsible for all charges for this service including hardware, subscription, taxes and other fees.

DKS VoIP and Data Options
VoIP + Data
Flat Rate

Monthly Fee4
23.95

VoIP Only

Monthly Fee4

Flat Rate

19.95

Data Only

Monthly Fee

Flat Rate

4.95

4. Includes VoIP service provided by DKS.

DKS IM Server ModemTM (Pat: 9,049,306)

DKS IM Server utilizes the POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) line connected to the telephone entry system to provide data (programming)
transfer to the DKS telephone entry / access control system via the internet connection at your programming computer. Voice
communication is provided over the POTS line. This service is useful if your programming PC does not have a modem, or if your modem
cannot communicate with the entry system modem1. This is a monthly subscription service without any long term contracts and includes
taxes and charges for the data communication only. DKS IM Server Modem is only available for use with 1830 series and Access Plus series
systems.
•
•
•
•

Plug & Play Data transfer connection – voice service provided by local telephone company.
Monthly fees range from $6.95 to $15.45 depending on the number of residents in the system database.
DoorKing maintains the right to determine excessive usage (data transfers) at any time and may require you to reduce your
usage (data transfers). Failure to comply may result in service termination.
Requires a POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) line1 at the entry system. User is responsible for all phone company charges
including local and long distance charges, taxes and other fees for this line.

1. DoorKing can no longer guarantee modem connections as some phone company services and switches no longer support modem communications since these devices are
considered to be obsolete technology. The telephone line at the entry system must support G.711 level service for the IM Server Modem to work. You should also be aware
that modem communications will not work over cellular or VoIP connections.

DKS IM Server ModemPat: 9,049,306 (Existing Phone Line Service2)
Voice + Data
Up to 100 Residents
101 – 250 Residents
251 – 500 Residents
501 + Residents

Pay per Month
6.95
9.45
11.95
15.45

Pay per Year
76.45
103.95
131.45
169.95

2. POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) line at the entry system provided by the local telephone company. User is responsible for all phone company charges including local and long
distance charges, taxes and other fees for this line.

PRICE SCHEDULE C 1.0
DKS Connection Option Fee Schedule

Rev 1-19



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Richard Sedivy
Comments                        : 
Create Date                     : 2019:01:16 08:24:46-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2019:01:28 15:42:49-05:00
Subject                         : 
Title                           : 
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c016 91.163616, 2018/10/29-16:58:49
Metadata Date                   : 2019:01:28 15:42:49-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 11 for Word
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Richard Sedivy
Document ID                     : uuid:fe66302c-320c-49c6-9cf7-e47d71a781af
Instance ID                     : uuid:300bd7d2-52eb-4319-97c0-11c2616f6845
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 11.0
Page Count                      : 180
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu